+ All Categories
Home > Documents > OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives...

OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives...

Date post: 15-Jul-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 0 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
213
NEMATICIDAL PROPERTIES OF XENOREMBDUS SPP. AND PHOTOiüX4BDUS SPP., BACTERIAL SYMBIONTS OF ENTOMOPATHOCEMC NEMATODES B.Sc., Northwestem College of Fonstry, Yangling, China, 1985 M.Sc., The Chinese Acaderny of Fonstry, Beijing, China, 1988 THESIS SUBMïlTED IN PARTIAL, FULFLMENT OF THE REQUlREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PWSOPHY in the Department of Biological Sciences OKAIJI HU 1999 SIMON FRASER UNIVERSïïY Al1 rights reserved. This work may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by photocopy or other means, without permission of the author.
Transcript
Page 1: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

NEMATICIDAL PROPERTIES OF XENOREMBDUS SPP. AND

PHOTOiüX4BDUS SPP., BACTERIAL SYMBIONTS OF

ENTOMOPATHOCEMC NEMATODES

B.Sc., Northwestem College of Fonstry, Yangling, China, 1985 M.Sc., The Chinese Acaderny of Fonstry, Beijing, China, 1988

THESIS SUBMïlTED IN PARTIAL, FULFLMENT OF THE REQUlREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF

DOCTOR OF P W S O P H Y

in the Department of

Biological Sciences

OKAIJI HU 1999

SIMON FRASER UNIVERSïïY

Al1 rights reserved. This work may not be reproduced in whole or in part, by photocopy

or other means, without permission of the author.

Page 2: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

National Library 1*1 of Canada Bibliothèque nationale du Canada

Acquisitions and Acquisitions et Bibliographie Senrices seMces bibliographiques

395 Wdlington Sireet 395, rue Weltington OniwaôN KlAOW OttawaON K l A W Canada Canade

The author has granted a non- exclusive licence ailowing the National Library of Canada to reproduce, loan, distribute or sell copies of this thesis in microfom, paper or electronic formats.

The author retains ownership of the copyright in this thesis. Neither the thesis nor substantial extracts fkom it may be phted or otherwise reproduced without the author's pemission.

L'auteur a accordé une licence non exclusive permettant à la Bibliothèque nationale du Canada de reproduire, prêter, distribuer ou vendre des copies de cette thèse sous la forme de microfiche/nlm, de reproduction sur papier ou sur format électronique.

L'auteur conserve la propriété du droit d'auteur qui protège cette thèse. Ni la thèse ni des extraits substantiels de celle-ci ne doivent être imprimés ou autrement reproduits sans son autorisation.

Page 3: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

ABSTRACT

Nematicidal properties of some secondary metabolites of Xenorhnbdus spp. and

Photorhabdus spp. (Enterobacteriaceae), bacterial symbiunts of the entomopathogenic

nematodes, Steinernema spp. and Heterorhabdiris spp., respectively, were identified and

evaluated.

Cell-free (CF) culture filtrates of X. bovienii, X. nematophilus and P. luminescens

isolates were shown to be nematicidal against Meloidogyne incognita and

Bursaphelenchus xylophilus. The degree of activity varied with the bacterial

isolate/species and the culture conditions, such as media composition, a p , pH and

aeration of the cultures.

Three metabolites, namel y ammonia, 3,s-dihydroxy4isopmpylstil bene (ST) and

indole, were identified from CF filtrates as having nematicidal properties. Ammonia was

common to al1 bacterial cultures tested. but ST was produced (10 - 30 pg/ml) by only P.

luminescens and indole was produced (10 - 50 pg/ml) by some straindspecies of both

Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus.

ST and indole affected viability, mobility, egg hatch and dispersal khaviour of

nematodes in vitro. ST was active against Aphelenchoides rhytium, Bursaphelenchus spp.

and Caenorhabditis eleguns, but was not lethal to infective juveniles (Us) of H. megidis

90. or second stage juveniles (J2s) of M. incognita at 200 pg/ml. Indole was active in

immersion tests against J2s (LOO - 400 pg/ml) of M. incognito, but failed to pievent

infection of tomato seedhgs by M. inmgnita foîlowing a soi1 (a0 pdml) or foüar

Page 4: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

application (<1,000 pglml). Indole repelled Us of some species of both Steinememu and

Heterorhabditis whereas ST repelled only some species of Steinemema.

ST, but no< indole, was detected in variable quantities (-665.2 to 4,182 pg/g wet

insect) in larval Galleria mellonella infected with Heterorhabditis spp. ST was produced

after 24 h of infection (2S°C) of the larvae, increased rapidly in quantity by 48 h to 5 d,

and nmained at a relatively hi@ and constant level even after the nematode symbiont had

completed its reproduction. Bacterial symbionts built up high populations (-10' cellslg

insect) within 24 h of entenng G. meilonella lame, and increased the cadaver pH to 7.4-

7.7.

The early production and relatively large amount of ST in nematode-infected

insect hosts, and the antibiotic, nematicidal and nematode-repelling properties of ST

suggest that it play a significant role in the symbiotic nematode-bacterium association.

The potential commercial application of these nematicidal metabolites may be limited by

their relatively narrow spectnim and low activity.

Page 5: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

1 would like to take this opportunity to express my heartfelt thanks for ail of the

people who kindly offered their thoughts and help during my research. 1 am deeply

grateful to Dr. J. M. Webster, rny senior supervisor, for his encouragement, guidance and

support throughout the course of this snidy. I would also like to thank Drs. J. R.

Sutherland and A. Plant for their helpful suggestions and comrnents during my research

and during the revision of the thesis. My thanks are also given to the following people

who offered their thoughts, encouragement and help during my research: Dr. J. Li for his

work on chemicai characterization and for his help and invaluable suggestions: Dr. G.

Chen and Mr. K. Ng for their discussion and help; Dm. V. L. Bourne and G. Gries, Mrs.

R. Gries and Mrs. M. SieWUnen as well as Mr. B. Leighton and Mr. M. Yang for their

technical support; Mr. Ian Bercovitz for statistical consulting; those mentioned in the text

for their kindness and generosity in providing some of the test materials (nematodes,

bacteria and plant seeds); finaily, my colleagues and friends for their discussion and help.

I acknowledge the financial support of five Graduate Fellowships, a President's

Ph.D. Research Stipend and a Prototype Developrnent Fund for Student Entrepreneurs

from Simon Fraser University and of support ihrough research gants to my senior

supervisor, Dr. J. M. Webster, from the National Science and Engineering Resemh

Council of Canada.

Finally, I would like to express my heartfelt gratitude to my wife and son for their

love, patience and support throughout the course of this study.

Page 6: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.4. Biossssys for nematiciàai actidty..... .............................................................. ...33

2.4.1. Activity of celi-free culture filtrates .............................. ............................ 33

2.4.2. Activity of metabolic compounds ........................ ..................................... ..33

.......... .......*.....**...*.......*..*.***.........*.... 2.4.3. Mortality of the test nematodes .... .34

.....*........... ........... 2.4.4. Antibacterial activity .. .. ............................................................................... .... 2.5. Staüsücal andysis.. ......... ..35

CHAITER 3. NEMATICIDAL PROPERTIES OF IN VZTRO

CULTURES OF THE BA~RIAeoooiooem~omooaoooooooomoomooooo~emmoomm~oooooooooeoo o o o e o o o 0 0 3 6

3.1. htrod~~tl~~ooooooeooo~oooo~oooeooee~mooooeommmoommoeooomomoe~om~omooommooeoaooooooooooe 0 sommomoooeommooom 0 l 0 0 oo.36

Page 7: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

3.2. Materials and ~ ~ t h o d s b m b m m b b b ~ ~ 0 b b ~ m b ~ b b 0 b b ~ b ~ b b b b b b b ~ b b ~ b ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ b m ~ b ~ ~ b ~ 0 ~ ~ b 0 b b ~ b ~ b ~ 0 ~ b ~ ~ b ~ b b b m m ~ 0 ~ 0 0 l *, b*bm m37

3.2.1. Bacteria and nematodes .... . .............................. . . . ................ . . . .. ... .... 37

3.2.2. Preparation of cell-free filtrates.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

3.2.3. Nematicidal activity of bacterial strains and species .............. ................ .. . . . . . . . .38

3.2.4. Nematicidal activity of the bacterial cultures against different nematode

species ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ... 39

3.2.5. Influence of bacterial culture conditions on nematicidal activity of the

culture filtrates ...... . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .,. . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,.. . . ..39

3.2.6. Nematicidal activity of organic and aqueous fractions of the culture

filtrates ... ...... ........... ....... ....... ........ . . . . ......... ............ . . .. ...... . .... . . . . . . . . .4 1

3.2.7. Nematicidal activity of some known antibiotics produced by

Xenorhabdus spp ..... ... .. . . . .. .... . . .. .. ..... . . . .. . ... ...... ... . . . . . ...... . . . . . . . ..... ..... . . . . . . . . .42

3.30 ~ e ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ o ~ ~ ~ ~ o ~ . o ~ ~ e ~ o o ~ ~ o b n m b o m ~ b b ~ o o ~ ~ m b ~ . b b ~ o o ~ b o m ~ b m m ~ m m b m b m m b m m m m m m b m b m b m m m m m o m m m b m m m m m m b m o m m l l memoa*mm l l l l l l l l e 4 3

3.3.1. Nematicidai activity of bacteriai strains and species. ... . . .. . . . ........................ .43

3.3.2. Nematicidal activity of different cultures against different nematodes

species ............... ..... .................................... ............ ..... . ..... ... ..... . ..... .. ........ .44

3.3.3. Influence of bacterial culture conditions on filtrate nematicidal activity ..... . . . . .44

3.3.4. Nematicidal activity of the organic and aqueous fractions of the

bacterial cultures ................. ... ..... + .............. ..... ....... ...+.... .... . ..... .... .... ......... . . . ...$ 1

3.3 S. Nematicidal activity of some known antibiotics produced by

Xenorhabdw spp ........................ .................................................. . . . . . . . . S4

3m4m D k ~ ~ ~ m m o m m m m o m ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ o m m o e ~ o m o m m m m m ~ m m o o m m m o ~ w ~ m o m m ~ ~ m m m m m o m o m m o o m w m m m m m m m l l l l l l moS4

CHAPTER 4. ISOLATION, IDENTIFICATION AND IN WTRO

vii

Page 8: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

PRODUCTION OF NEMATICIDAL METABOLITES FRûM

.......................................................................... BACTERIAL CULTURES ..SS

................................................................................... 4.2. Materiah md metbods.... .Sa

4.2.1. Bacteria and their broth cultures ............ ...,.......... ......................................... 58

4.2.2. Generai procedures for isolation and identification of nematicidai

....................................................................................... metabolites .......... ., S9

4.2.3. Isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites €rom cultures of

........................................ Photorhabdus luminescens and Xenorhabdus spp 62

4.2.4. In vitro production of the nematicidal substances identified from the

....................... ........... bacterial cultures ,.. 65

.............................. luminescens and Xenorhabdw spp ....................................... 71

4.3.2. In vitro production of the nematicidal metabolites produced by

Xenorhabdus spp . and Photorhobdus spp ............... ........... . .. ........................ 73 .......................................................................................................... 4.4. DISCUsslon. d g

CELIPTER 5 . NEMATICIDAL PROPERTIES OF 33-DIEiYDROXY-4-

..................................... ISOPROPYLSTILBENE (ST) AND INDOLE... ..94

........................................................................................................... 5.1 C O 94

............. 5.2. Mahtfll)S md methalSom ....m...........~......o.......o.........o.o...m.......~..~.oo.m...o..... 94

5.2.1. Test nematodes .....................~.......................................................................... 94

5.2.2. Nematicidal activiy of ST and indole against different nematode species ..... -95

viii

Page 9: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

5.2.3. In vivo effect of indole on Meloidogyne incognita ............... .. .. ...*..... . . . . . . ... 100

5.2.4. Nematicidal activity of some indole derivatives ....................... .. ... . . ..... ... 103

5.2.5. Chemosensory effect of ST and indole on different mmatode species .... . . . . . . .104

53. R ~ ~ l f S m m o m m m m m o o m m m m * m m m m m m o m m o o m m m o m m o ~ m ~ m m m m m ~ o a m m o o m m o ~ m o o m m m o o m m m m ~ a m o m m m m m o m m m m m m l l 0 l *0 l a. 105

5.3.1. Nematicidai activity of ST and indole ............. .. .............................. . . . .. . . .. 105 5.3.2. Effect of ST and indole on egg hatch of the nematodes ............................... 1 15

5.3.3. In vivo activity of indole on Meloidogyne incognita. .. ... .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. 1 15

5.3.4. Nematicidal activity of some indole derivatives .............................. . . . . . . . . .. 12 1

5.3 .S. Chemosensory effect of ST and indole on nematodes .............. .... .... .. . . . . 1 2 1

5.40 D i ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ i ~ n m m m o o m o m m o m ~ m o m m m m m m o m m m m m m o m m m m m m ~ m m m ~ m m m o o m a o ~ m ~ m ~ m m m m m m m m m . m m m m m m m m m m ~ m ~ m m m m m ~ m m m m m m m m m m m m o o m l l l l l l l l l l 126

CHAPTER 6 m IN VIVO OCCURRENCE OF NEMATICIDAL

METABOLITES IN RELATION TO BACTERIAL GROWTH AND

NEMATODE D E V E L O P M E N T ~ m m m m m m m m m m m ~ m m m m m m m m m m m e m m m m m m m m m m mmmm.mmmammmmm.mmmmm l l l l l l l m a m l 3 0

60 1. I ~ t ~ d ~ ~ t i ~ ~ o m m m m . m m o m o ~ o m m m o m m m m m o m ~ e m m m m m m m m ~ m m m m o m m m m m m m m m m m m m m o m m o m m m m m m m m m o m m m m m m m m m m m m m m l 0 l l 0 l l l 0 130

6.2. Materials and ~ ~ t h o d s ~ ~ ~ m m ~ m m ~ m m m m m m m m m m m m o o m m m ~ ~ ~ ~ m ~ m o o m m o m m m m m m m m m l l l mm l l l 130

6.2.1. G. mellonella larvae and entomopathogenic nematodes .............. ... ..... . . . . .. 130

4.2.2. Detection and identification of indole from nematode-infected larval

cadavers of G. mell~nella*.~* .... +. ...... ....*.*.*eC*.**.*....* .... .,. .... *... 131

6.2.3. Detection of indole over time in larvai cadavers of G. mellonella infected

wifh P. luminescens MD.. .... .......... .*-.....~-.C~~-..~...................... . . . .. . . . . .* . .. . . ... 132

6.2.4, IsoIation and identification of ST from infected lacval cadavers of

G. mellonella ..... ........... -.........*.........e..*...*....****.L... . . . .. . .... 133

6.2.5. Quantitative analysis of ST from nematode-infected lamal cadavers of

Page 10: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

G. mellonella ....... .,. ...................................................................................... 134

6.2.6. Occurrence of ST and indole in relation to the development of

Heterorhabditis and growth of Photorhabdus in larval G. mellonella

cadavers ........................................................................................ ,136

6.2.7. Occurrence of ST and indole in larvd G. mellonella cadavers infected

.................... by different Photorhabdur spp.-Heterorhabditis spp. complexes 139

6.3. Res~lts..,...................~..~.........~....~.....................~....~..............~......... ....... ...140

6.3.1. Detection of indole from larvai cadavers of G. mellonella infected by

H. megidis W... ......................................................................... 140

6.3.2. Detection of indole from larval cadavers of G. mellonella injected with P.

luminescens MD alone ................................................................................... 140

6.3.3. Isolation and identification of ST from larval cadavers of G. mellonella

infected by H. megidis 90 ............................ .. ........................................ .14 1

6.3.4. Quantitative analysis of ST from infected l a r d cadavers of

G. mell~nella.~ ...... .. ..................................... ........................... .............. 141

6.3.5. Occurrence of ST in relation to the development of Heterorhabditis

and growth of Photorhabdus in larval G. mellonella cadavers .......................... 145

6.3.6. In vivo production of ST by different Photorhobdus spp ................... ... .... 157

Page 11: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.

Table 2.

Table 3.

Table 4.

Table 5.

Table 6.

Species of Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus and their respective nematode

.................................... symbionts, Steinernema and Heterorhabditis species 4

Major characteristics distinguisbing Xenorhabdus spp. from Photorhabdus

spp ............................................................................................................. ..7

Bioactive agents associated with or derived fmm the bacterial symbionts,

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., of entomopathogenic

nematodes.. ................. ,... .. ....................................................................... ..23

................... Species and sources of nematodes and bacteria used in this study 27

Percentage mortality of second stage juveniles of Meloidogyne incognita

(MI) and fourth stage juveniles and aûults of Bursaphelenchus

xylophilus BC (BX) exposed to the diluted, cell-free culture filtrates

(4 d-old filtrated culture and diluted to 1M or 114 strength) of

............................. Xcnorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus luminescens.. ..47

Percentage mortality of second stage juveniles of Meloidogyne incognita

(MI) exposed to the diluted, cell-fne culture filtrates (4 d-old filtrated

culture and diluted to 1/2 or 114 stmgth) of Xenorhabdus nemutophilus

BC 1 grown in tryptic soy broth (TSB), Luria broth (LB) and nutrient

...... ....... broth (NB), respectively ......-..*.-......................*..*.-..*.. ..48

Table 7. Nematicidai activity of the 4 d-old cell-fiee fütrates of Xenorhabdus

bovienii A2 1 (Ml) and X. nematophius BC 1 @Cl) against second

stage juveniies of Meloidogyne incognita 0 when the filtrates were

Page 12: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

adjusted, using 6N NaOH or HCI, to pH values ranging from 5.0 to

9.0 ................................................................................................................. 52

Table 8. Nematicidal activity of dried organic and aqueous fractions of

Xenorhubdus spp. and Photorhubdus luminescens against second stage

juveniles of Meloidogyne incognita (MI) and fourth stage juveniles and

adults of Burmphelenchus xylophilus BC (BX). ................................... 53

Table 9. Nematicidal activity of some known antibiotics produced by

Xenorhabdus spp. when tested against fourth stage juveniles and

...............*.... ...................... adults of Bursaphelenchus xylophilus .... -55

Table 10. Summary of nematicidal metabolites identified from cultures of

different isolates of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus

luminescens.. .......................................................................... .72

Table 1 1. Concentration of ammonia and its salt(s) (NHi Wml) in 4 d-old

culture broths of Xenorhabdur spp. and Photorhabdus luminescens

gmwn in TSB ......................................................................................... 79

Table 12. pH and concentration of ammonia and its salt(s) of tryptic soy broth

(TSB), Luna broth (LB) and nutrient broth (NB) in which Xenorhabdus

.................. ............*....... nemutophilus BC 1 had k e n grown for 4 d ... .84

Table 13. Occurrence of indole in broth cultures of Xenorhubdus spp. and

Photorhabdus luminescens grown in tryptic soy broth (TSB), nutrient

broth (NB) or Luria broth (LB) for 1.2 or 4 d .................. ........... .... ..86

Table 14. Inhibitory effect of 3,s-dihydroxy4isopropylstiIbene (ST) and indole

on the percentage of egg hatch of Meloidogyne Nicognita over 5 d

xii

Page 13: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

followed by immersion in distilled water for another 5 d ............................ 1 16

Table 15. Effect of 3,5-dihydroxy-4-isopropylsti1bene (ST) on percentage of

egg hatch of Bursaphelenchus xylophilus BC.. .................................. .1 17

Table 16. Effect of indole on infection of tomato seedlings by second stage

juveniles of Meloidogyne incognita in sand application tests ....................... 1 18

Table 17. Effect of indole on infection of tomato seedlings by second stage

juveniles of Meloidogyne incognito in foliage spray tests .......................... 120

Table 18. Nematicidal activity of some indole derivatives against

................................. Bursaphelenchus xylophilus BC in immersion tests -122

Table 19. Chemosensory effect of 3,5-dihydroxy-4-isopropylsti1ùene (ST) and

indole on different nematode species w hen tested at O. 1, 1, 10 and

100 pddisc in 1.5% agar plates ................................................................... 125

Table 20. Extraction of 3,s-dihydroxy4isopropylstilbene (ST), using different

solvents, from cadavers of Galleria mellonella infected by

. . Heterorhabdatis megidis 90 ........................ ... ........... ..............O....b...... 144

Table 2 1. Recovery of 3,s-dihydroxy4isopropylsti~bene (ST) with acetone

h m healihy Galleria rnellonella larvae injected with known arnounts

.......... .. of ST. ..o...........C.................................................................. 146

Table 22. Characteristics of Vp (primary form) and Vsm (small-colony variant)

................. of Photorhabdus luminescens MD .,,,....*.................................... .155

Table 23. Concentration of 3,5-dihydroxy4isopropylstilbene (ST) produced

by Hetetorhabditis spp. - Photorhbdus spp. complexes in

larval cadavers of Gallertu m e l l d l a at 7 d postinfection.. .................... 158

Page 14: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

LIST OF FIGURES

Fig. 1. Generalized life cycle of entomopathogenic nematodes, Steinemema spp.

and Heterorhabditis spp ..................... ....... .............+........................... .17

Fig. 2. Percentage mortality and paralysis of second stage juveniles of Meloidogyne

incognita exposed to diluted, cell-free culture filtrates (4 d-old filtrated

cultures diluted to !A sangth) of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus

luminescens.. ............................................................................. ..45

Fig. 3. (a) Growth. (b) pH and (c) nematicidal activity against Meloidogyne

incognita (second stage juveniles) of Xenorhabdus bovienii A2 1 (A2 1).

.......... X. nematophilus BC 1 (BC 1 ) and Photorhobdus luminescens MD (MD) .49

Fig. 4. Fiow-chart showing the general isolation process of the organic extracts

....................... from broth cultures of Xenorhabdw spp. or Photovhubdus spp ..60

Fig. 5. Structures of (a) 3.5-dihydroxy4isopropylstilbene (ST) (R=CH3) and

........................................................................... ........................... (b) indole .. 74

Fig. 6. UV spectra of (a) 3.5-dihydroxy4isopropylstilbene (ST) and (b) indole ........ .76

Fig. 7. Concentration of arnmonia and its salt(s) (NE&+ pg/mi) in culture broths

of Xenorhabdus bovienii A2 1 (A2 1 ), X nemtophilus BC 1 (BC 1) and

...... Photorhabdus Iminescens C9 (Cg) grown in tryptic soy broth over 5 days 80

Fig. 8. (a) Bacterid growth, (b) pH and (c) concentraiion of arnmonia and

its salt(s) of Xenorhabdus bovienii A21 in tryptic soy broth as infiuenced

by aeration of the culture ..................... ............................................ ....... ..82

Jtiv

Page 15: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 9. Production over time of 3.5-dihydroxy4isopmpylstilbene (ST) and

indole (HD) in culture broths of Photorhabdus luminescens C9 (Cg)

and Photorhabdus luminescens MD (MD) grown in tryptic soy broth.. ........ ..87

Fig. 10. Sand colurnn used in the migration tests of the second stage juveniles of

...... Meloidogyne incognita. ............................. ... . 9

Fig. 1 1. Arrangement of filter paper discs on the surface of an agar Petri dish

(100 x 15 mm) in relation to the point of introduction (0) of nematodes for

chemosensory tests .......................................................................................... -106

Fig. 12. Nematicidal activity of (a) 3.5-dihydroxy+isopropylsti1bene (ST) and

(b) indole against nematodes of different species in test solutions in

..................... small Peh dishes .. ...................................................................... 108

Fig. 1 3. Percentage mortality and paral ysis of (a) Bursaphelenchus qlophilus BC

(juveniles and adults), (b) Meloidogyne incognita (second stage juven iles)

and (c) Heterorhabditis sp. HMD (infective juveniles) following

............................. immersion in indole solutions at different concentrations 1 t 1

Fig. 14. Inhibitory effect of indole on mobility of second stage juveniles (J2s) of

............................ Meloidogyne incognita in a sand column afier 24 h treatment 1 13

Fig. 15. A diagrammatic representation showing the influence of

3.5-dihydroxy4-isopropylstilbene (ST) and indole on dispersal

behaviour of different nematde species on Petri dishes .................................. 123

Fig. 16. Cornparison of HPLC chromatograms of a typical test sample extracted

from Galleria mellonella larvae infected with Heterorhabditis megiàis 90,

as detected at two different wavelengths (254 nm and 3 15 nm) ........................ 142

Page 16: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 17. (a) Occurrence of 3.5-dihydroxy4isopropyIstilbene (ST), (b) population

dynarnics of Photorhobdus luminescens C9 and (c) pH of larval

cadavers of Galleria mellonella infected by Heterorhabditis megidis 90

over time in two repeat experiments (Exp-1 and Exp-2) ................................. .147

Fig. 18. TU: chromatogram of 3.5-dihydroxy4isopropylstilbene (ST) and of

two test samples extracted from Galleria mellonella larvae infected

............ with Heterorhabdiris megidis 90,2 and 5 d (2d and 5d) after infection 149

Fig. 19. (a) Occurrence of 3.5-dihydroxy-44sopropylstilbene (ST), (b) population

dynamics of the pnmary form (Vp) and a smallsolony variant (Vsm) of

Photorhabdus luminescens MD and (c ) pH of larval cadavers of Galleria

mellonrlla infected by Heterorhabditis sp. HMD over time in two

repeat experiments (Exp- 1 and Exp-Z).. ..................................................... .153

Page 17: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

AW: average weight;

CF: cell-free;

CFU: colony-forming unit;

DMSO: dimethyl sulfoxide;

ECm : concentration causing paralysis and mortality in 50% of test nematodes;

HD: indole;

HPLC : high performance liquid c hromatography ;

U(s): infective juvenile(s) of Steinemema spp. and Heterorhabditis spp.

12s: second stage juveniles of Meloidogyne incognita;

J4s: fourth stage juveniles of the nematodes;

LB: Luna broth (base, Miller) (Sigma@);

LCm: concentration causing mortality in 50% of test nematodes;

Mg: a buffer solution formulated specially for the nematode Caenorhabditis elegans;

MS: mass spectmm;

NB: nutrient broth;

PBS : phosphate-buffered saline;

PDA: potato dextrose agar;

PEG: polyethylene glycol;

SD (water): sterilized distilled (water);

SMS: streptornycin sulfate;

ST: 3,Sdi hydroxy4isopropylsti1 bene;

TLC: thin-l ayer chromatopph y;

TSA: agar medium of TSB;

TSAD: TSA plus dye (25 mg bromothyrnol blue/L TSA);

TSB: tryptic soy broth wlo dextrose @ifco@);

UV: ultraviolet;

VM: volatiIe and nematicidal materials;

Vp: primary form of Phofurhubdus luminescens MD;

xvii

Page 18: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Vsm: small-colony variant of the primary forni of Photorhabdus luminescens MD;

WS : wet-strength;

Page 19: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CHAITER 1

INTRODUCTION

Much of the incnase in agricultural productivity over the past half century has

been due to more efficacious and economical pest control through the use of synthetic

chernical pesticides (Duke et al.. 1993; Hall, 1995; Pimentel, 1997). However, in ment

years there has been an increasing tendency to control pests by biological pesticides,

natural products and other environmentally benign measures (National Research Council,

1996; Whitten et al., 1996). This trend is due rnainly to increasing public concems about

the adverse effects of synthetic chemical pesticides on human health and environmental

safety and the increasing resistance of the pests to chemical pesticides (Rodgers, 1993;

Cross and Polonenko, 1996). Consequently, some pesticides have k e n deregistered or

their use restricted during the past decade, and many others are facing similar restrictions

(May, 1993; Cross and Polonenko, 1996). As an alternative, environmentdly acceptable

pest control measure, there has been a substantial investment into the exploration and

commercialization of some biological agents and naturai products from plants and

microorganisrns (Chitwd, 1993; Rodgers, 1993; Cross and Polonenko, 1996) that are

selective against the pests and are biodegradable.

Ail living organisms are subject to predation, parasitism or competition from

other organisms. Numerous scientific studies have shown that a wide variety of

microorganisrns and natural proâucts are capable of effectively controlling pests such as

weeds, insects, nematodes and bacterial and fungal disease causing agents. Research into

improving the efficacy of entomopathogenic nematodes has k o m e a major focus in

Page 20: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

ment years. because of widespread interest in their commercial application to control

insect pests (Kaya et al., 1993; Wilkinson and Hay, 1997). As well, then is a growing

research interest in the bioactive properties of the secondary metabolites of their bacterial

symbionts, Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., respectively (Webster et al., 1998;

Li et al., 1998). The insecticidal toxins isolated from cultures of the symbiotic bacterium,

P. luminescens, have the potential to be the next generation of micmbial insecticides

(Ensign et al., 1990; Bowen et al., 1998; Gou et al.. 1999). The antibiotic production by

the symbiotic bacteria may lead to the development of novel agrochemicals and dmgs

(Webster et al., 1998; Li et al., 1998) and these could have significant commercial

potential.

In preliminary tests, 1 observed that cultures of Xenorhabdus spp. were

nematicidal against the plant-parasitic nematode, Meloidogyne incognita. This discovery

of nematicidai activity against M. incognita was a surprise in view of the symbiotic

relationship of these bacteria with nematodes. The results were interesting also because

such naturally derived nematicidal agents are especially attractive to nsearchers at a time

when mosi chernical nematicides are king withdrawn from use for environmental

reasons (Noling and Becker, 1994). Further studies of this nematicidal phenornenon could

help us understand better the symbiotical relationship ktween the bacteria and their

nematode symbionts. It may help us also to control nematode pests at the same time as

controlling insect pests when entomopathogenic nematodes arc applied. Thus, the overall

biology and properties of these symbionts will be outlined as a prelude to defining my

research objective.

Page 21: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus are members of the family Enterobacteriaceae

(Thomas and Poinar, 1979; Akhurst and Boemare, 1988; Boemare et al., 1993a). Five

species of Xenorhabdus and one species of Photorhabdus have been described and

accepted as valid (Font and Nealson, 1996; Boemare et al., 1997; Table 1).

The presence of symbiotic bacteria in entornopathogenic nematodes was first

postulated by Bovien (1937) and Dutky (1937). The first of these to be identified was

Achromobacter nematophilus (Poinar and Thomas, 1965), a syrnbiont of the DD-136

isolate of a Steinernema (=Neoaplectana) species, and these authors regarded the

association between the bactenum and the nematode as a fonn of mutualism (Poinar and

Thomas, 1966). The new bacterial genus, Xenorhabdus, was designated (Thomas and

Poinar, 1979) and later amended (Thomas and Poinar, 1983) following rejection of the

genus Achromobacter (Buchanan and Gibbons, 1974; Hendrie et al., 1974). Based on

extensive numerical analysis of 45 characteristics of 20 svains of Xenorhabdus spp.,

Akhunt and Boemare (1988) elevated four subspecies of X. nematophilus, narnely

nematophilus. poinarii, bovienii, beddingii, to the species level. After analyzing the

relative phylogenetic position of different strains and species of Xenorhabdus, using 16s

rRNA cataloping, Ehlen et al. (1988) found that X. nematophilus and X. luminescens

were not as closely related as had been thought previously, and they proposed that X.

luminescens be treated as a taxonomie unit equivalent to that of the farnily

Enterobacteriaceae in which it is cumntly placed. Subsequently, Boemare et al.(1993a),

based on DNA analysis, proposed that a new genus, Photorhabdur, accommodate

the luminescent bacteria associated with entomopathogenic nematodes, Heterorhabditis

Page 22: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 1. S p i e s of Xenorliobdus and Photorhabdus and their respective nematode

symbionts, Steinemema and Hetemrhabditis species

Bacteria Nematode symbionts Re ferences

X. bedding ii

X. bovien ii

X. japonicus

X. nematophilus

X. poinarii

Steinemema sp.

S. o#he

S. feltiae

S. intemedium

S. kraussei

S. kushidai

Xenorhabdus spp. S. abbusi*

S. arenarium

Se bicomuttun

S. caudatum

S. cerutuphotum

S. howaiiensis

Akhurst and Boemare, 1988

Steiner, 1923

Filipjev, 1934

Bovien, 1937

Poinar, 1985

Akhurst and Boemare, 1988

Marniya 1988

Nishimura et al., 1994

Weiser, 1955

Akhurst and Boemare, 1988

Steiner, 1929

Akhurst and Boemare, 1988

Mracek et al., 1994

Fischer et al., 1999

Elawad et al., 1997

Elawad and Hague, 1998

Artyukhovsky, 1967

Tallosi et al., 1995

Xu et al., 199 1

Iian et al., 1997

Gardner et al., 1994

to be continued

Page 23: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 1. (continued)

S. karii

S. long icaudum

S. monticolum

S. neoctrrtillae

S. oregonense

S. puertoncense

S. ra rum

S. riobrave

S. ritteri

S. siamkayui

S. scapterisci

Photorhabdus luminescens H. bacteriophoru

H. megidis

H. zealandica

Photorhabdus spp. H. argentinensis

H. brevicaudis

H. hawaiiensis

H. indicus

H. maraletus

Waturu et al., 1997

Shen and Wang, 1992

Stock et al., 1997

Nguyen and Srnart, 1992

Liu and Berry, 1996a

Roman and Figueroa, 1994

de Doucet, 1986

Cabanillas et al., 1994

de Doucet and Doucet, 1990

Stock et al., 1998

Nguyen and Smart, 1990

Poinar, 1976

Poinar et al., 1987

Poinar, 1990

Boemare et al., 1993a

Stock, 1993

Liu, 1994

Gardner et al., 1994

Poinar et al., 1992

Liu and Berry, 1996b

*: S. ubbari may not be associated with Xenorhabdus sp. Refer to reference for details.

Page 24: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

spp. A ment study, comparing partial 16s rRNA gene sequences, found at least two

well-supported taxonomic groups within Photorhabdus which suggest that the genus may

be polyspecific (Liu et al., 1997). The identification of several isolates of P. luminescens

€rom a few human clinical specimens (Colepicolo et al., 1989; Farmer et al., 1989;

Akhurst et al., 1998) is unusual since al1 other isolates have been collected from

entomopathogenic nematodes in the soil. However, DNA-DNA hybridization has shown

that although these clinical isolates are closely related to each other they are sufficiently

different to consider them to be new species (Forst and Nealson, 1996).

The major discriminative characteristics between the genera Xenorhabdus and

Photorhabdus are listed in Table 2. Many taxonomic studies provide evidence for

separating these bacterial symbionts into the two genera (Wimpee et al., 1991; Boemare

et al., 1993a; Stackebrandt et al., !997). However, there continues to be some uncertainty

over the split within the genus Xenorhabdus (Rainey et al., 1995; Forst and Nealson,

1996; Liu et al. 1997; Stackebrandt et al., 1997). Part of the problem appears to be the

use of DNA-DNA hybridization methods. The technique is known to be useful for

species sepmtion but less so for delineation of genera (Forst and Nealson, 1996). The

inter- and intrageneric DNA-DNA similarity values are so low for the majority of the

species that this technique is not the optimum one to use (Stackebrandt et al., 1997).

Sirnilarly, thel6S rDNA similarity values and the majority of phylogenetic trees

generated €rom the sequence data did not indicate these two genera to be sister gmups

(Stackebrandt et al., 1997).

Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus are considered atypical Enterobacteriaceae

(Boemare et al., 1997). because most of the Xenorhabdw and Photorhabdus species are

Page 25: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 2. Major characteristics distinguishing Xenorhubdus spp. h m Photorhabdus

--

Character Xenorhabdus Photorhabdus

Isolated fmrn Steinemema spp. + Isolated from Heterorhabditis spp. - Bioluminescence - Cat alase - Pigment unknown

Antibiotics** xenorhabdins, xenorxides

xenocoumacins, xenomins

nematophin, indoles

- + + + anthraquinones

hydrox ystilbenes

anthraquinones

genistein, Ap

furan derivative

*: Modified from Font and Neaison (1996). +: positive; -: negative.

**: Ap and a hiran derivative are novel antibiotics (Hu et al., unpubl.).

Page 26: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

nitrate-reductase negative (similar to a few strains of Envinia and Yersinia species) and.

in addition, species of Xenorhabdus are catalase negative (similar to some strains of

Shigella dysenteria O group 1). Based on the results of whole-ce11 fatty acid patterns.

Janse and Smits (1990) suggested that the Xenorhabdus spp. may be sufficientiy

different from other enterobacteria to exclude them from the Enterobacteriaceae. The

taxonomic details that support this concept of them king separate from the

Enterobacteriaceae are still in question, as is the issue of whether Xenorhabdus and

Photorhabdus are themselves separate genera (Forst and Nealson, 1996: Stackebrandt et

al., 1997). As more isolates of both genera are ideniified. it seems likely that more species

will be established. and our overall view of the taxonomic status of this nmarkable group

of bacteria will change accordingly (Forst and Nealson, 1996; Stackebrandt et al.. 1997).

Xenorhabdus and Photorhubdw are chemoheterotrophic bacteria that use both

respiratory and fermentative metabolism. They are motile with peritrichous flagella,

nonsponilating, oxidase negative and Gram negative rods (2-10 x 0.3-2.0 p) (Boemare

et al., 1993% Font and Nealson. 1996), but filamentous f o m rnay occur under

conditions of low osmolarity (Krasomil-Osterfeld, 1995).

Al1 but one strain (4-614) of Photorhabdus are bioluminescent (Akhuat and

Boemare, 1986). However, a variant of strain Q-614 was recently recorded to =store the

luminescent property (Boemare, 1995). When an insect is infccted by nematodes carrying

P. luminescens the whole insect glows in the dark (Poinar et al., 1980b). Poinar et al.

(1980b) speculated that the glowing cadaver might attract other insects that could k

infected by the emerging infective juveniles (Us). An alternative hypothesis is that the

Page 27: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

bioluminescence may be inhibitory to some invertebrate predators (Akhurst and Boemare,

1990). Bioluminescence is very weak dunng the U emergence phase of nematode

development, but is at its peak when the nematodes in the cadavers are in the multiplying

non-infective stage of development. Some invertebrate predators might be expected to be

photophobie and so avoid the glowing cadaver and its developing nematodes.

Both Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. can be grown as free-living

organisms in microbiological media, such as tryptic soy broth (TSB), nutrient broth (NB)

and Luna Broth (LB) (Li et al., 1995a; Liu et al., 1997; Volgyi et al., 1998). As the

bacteria enter the stationary phase of their growth cycle, they secrete several extracel Iular

products, including lipase(s), phospholipase(s), protease(s), and several different broad

spectnim antimicrobial agents (Akhurst and Dunphy, 1993; Li et al., 1998). Cytoplasmic

inclusion bodies, composed of crystalline proteins. are produced by both bacterial genera

during the stationary phase (Couche and Gregson. 1987). In fresh plate cultures, the

bacterid colonies readily absorb dye such as bromothymol blue or neutral red added into

the medium (Boemare and Akhunt, 1988). The optimum in vitro temperature for growth

of most strains and species of Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus is 2S°C (Thomas and

Poinar, 1979). Their doubling time varies from 0.8 to 3.0 h depending on the culture

medium, temperature and species of bactemm (Poinar et al., L980b; Dunphy et al.,

1985).

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. have not been isolated directly from the

soil (Akhurst and Boemare, 1990). It is generally believed that the bacterial symbionts

cannot survive in the soil environment outside of their nematode symbionts, even after

king introduced axenically into autoclaved soil (Poinar et al., 1980b; Chen et al., 1996).

Page 28: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

However, there is speculation that the bacteria may exist as phase II cells or variants

outside of the Us and infected insect cadavers (Font and Nealson, 1996). Their presence

in soils or other environments rnay have ken missed, because the usual rnethod for their

identification relies heavily on those properties that are usually strongly expressed in

phase 1 rather than phase II cells (Hurlbert et al., 1989; Smigielski et al., 1994; Forst and

Nealson. 1996). in fact. Morgan et al. (1997) reported that a non-culturable but viable

population of cells was detected when X. nematophilus and P. luminescens were

inoculated into sterile river water. The results indicated that cells of Xenorhabdus spp.

and Photorhabdus spp. may survive longer than anticipated in the environment and

nmain undetectable using standard rnicrobiological methods. The above suggestion was

further supported by the observation (Bleakley and Chen, 1999) that P. luminescens,

either from nematodes or a human wound, survived in previously sterilized soil for 30 d.

It has been suggested that colony hybridizations with specific gene probes such as lu

genes, lipase genes, pigment genes, or others might be a good approach ta clarify the

presence of the bacterial spbionts in the soil (Forst and Nealson, 1996).

Poiymorphic foms of Xenorhabdur and Photorhabdus commonly occur, as they

do in many other bacterial species (Silverman and Simon, 1983). Most Xenorhubdus spp.

and Photorhnbdus spp. typically occur in two extreme colony fotms when cultured in

vitro. These fonns are referred to as phase 1 (primary fom) and phase II (secondary form)

(Akhurst and Boemare, 1990). Reversion from phase II to phase 1 is cornmon in

Xenorhubdw spp. However, reversion of Photorhabdus h m the secondary to the

primary form has not been detected in any solid medium culture (Gemtsen et al., 1992)

Page 29: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

though nveaion rnay occur under certain conditions in Iiquid cultures (Krasomil-

Osterfeld, 1995).

Phase 1 and II differ in many characteristics. In general, phase 1 cells produce

proteases, phospholipases, lipases, and crystalline proteins, binds to specific dyes

(Akhurst, 1980; Boemare and Akhurst, 1988) and produce antimicrobial agents in culture

broth (Akhurst, 1982). Phase 1 cellular populations are pleomorphic, larger than phase Il

cells, contain rods (80-90%) and spheroplasts (IO-20%), are motile with pentnchous

flagella and s w m on appropriate aga- media (Givaudan et al., 1995). have

paracrystalline inclusions and fimbriae (Boemare et al., 1983; Brehelin et al., 1993). In

the case of Photorhabdus, phase 1 is luminescent (Poinar et al., 1980b; Boemare et al.,

1997). Phase II generally does not have the above properties typical of phase 1. Moreover,

phase iI occurs only under certain culture conditions, such as prolonged incubation or

lowssmolarity (Akhurst 1980; Krasomil-Ostetfeld, 1995). Analysis has shown that phase

1 and phase iI differ also in their ceIl surface properties, serology and in respiration

(Brehelin et al., 1993; Smigielski et ai., 1994; Gemtsen et al., 1995). As weli, phase 1,

the naturally occumng symbiont of the nematode, supports nematode propagation but

phase II does not (Akhurst and Boemare, 1990; Ehlers et al., 1990). However, both

phases are similar in king entomopathogenic and they commonly share vimially d i the

other bacteriological properties (Boemare, 1995).

Other pol ymorphisms, named colonylfonn variants, have been reported from

cultures of P. luniinescens (Hurlbert et al., 1989; Gemtsen et al., 1992). Some colony

variants were reponed as king similar to phase I while others were sirnilar to phase II in

ceIl size, colony fom, luminescence, pathogcnicity, antibiotic production, pigmentation

Page 30: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

and dye adsorption. The variants can revert to each other and to their parental phase I or II

at a relatively high frequency.

Phase variation of Xenorhabdus has ken suggested to be a mechanism for

escaping the lytic activity of a bacteriophage that lyses phase 1 but not phase II (Poinar et

al., 1980a; Poinar et al., 1989). However, studies have since showed that phase II of some

Xenorhabdus can revert to phase 1 at a relatively high frequency (Akhurst, 1980), and no

diffennces has been detected in the plasmid patterns between phase 1 and II cells of

Xenorhabdus (Leclerc and Boemare, 199 1). Thaler et al. (1997) found that bacteriocins

occur naturally in low quantities in both phases of Xenorhabdus spp. Akhurst et al.

(1992) did extensive restriction fragment length polymorphism analysis and excluded the

possibility that phase variation may be a result of a rearrangement of the major DNA of

the bacteria. The occurrence of intermediate variants or colony variants suggests that the

mechanism of phase variation is more cornplex, and a variety of mechanisms may be

openiting at different levels (Forest and Neaison, 1996). Such mechanism(s) may also

differ between Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus (Boemare, 1995).

The significance of fodcolony variants is unknown, but they and phase 1 and

phase II fonns may have evolved so as to give a suwival advantage to these bacteria

under changing environmental conditions (Hurlbea et al., 1989; Akhurst and Boemare,

199û; Gemtsen et al., 1992). The retention of the symbionts by Us that escape from the

insect cadaver is the beginning of a starvation p e n d for the bacteria whereas their release

into the hemolymph is the b e g i ~ i n g of an optimum growtb peciod. These opposite

environmental biotopes have piobably forceci adpptive responses and phase variation may

be a survival strategy (Boernace, 1995). Smigielski et al. (1994) speculateà that the phase

Page 31: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

1 cells are better adapted to conditions in the insect and the nematode spbiont, whereas

phase II cells are better adapted to free-living conditions in the soil. Further nsearch is

necessary since Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. have not k e n detected in soil.

The pathogenicity of the bacterium - nematode complexes to insects varies with

the nematode and insect species, the immunological and physiological state of the insect,

and on the nature of the interaction of the bacteral and nematode symbionts (Gotz et al.,

1985; Akhurst and Dunphy, 1993; Sambeek and Wiesner, 1999).

The pathogenicity of phase II Xenorhabdus cells toward Galleria mellonella is

similar to that of the phase 1 (Akhunt, 1980; Akhunt and Boernare. 1990). However,

Volgyi et al. (1998) demonstrated recently that the phase II of X. nematophilus AN6

(AN6m) was significantly less virulent than the phase 1 cells of X. nematophilus (AN6IZ)

to larval Manduca sextu, an insect with a more potent immune system than G. mellonella.

They showed also that the virulence of phase 1 and Ii is variable and can be influenced by

environmentai conditions.

Although the bacteria alone are usually pathogenic, they need to gain access to the

hemolyrnph and this is rhieved by the nematode symbionts acting as a vector. X.

nematophilus and Photorhabdus sp. are not pathogenic to G, mellonella when applied

orally or topically to the insect (Poinar and Thomas, 1967; Milstead, 1979). Lysenko and

Weiser (1974) suggested that the nematode did not merely hinction as "living syringes"

since when a highly virulent bacterium was injected into G. mellonella by the nematode.

it did not necessarily cause hi& percentage mortality of die G. mellonella lame or vice

versa Akhurst (1986) showed that both the nematade and its bacterid syrnbiont were

Page 32: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

necessary for the X. poinarii - S. gfaseri complex to cause larval mortality of G.

mellonella as neither the bacterium nor the nematode alone caused insect death.

Taxonomic and experimental studies confirm that each species of

entomopathogenic nematodes has a specific natural association with only one

Xenorhabdus species though a Xenorhabdus sp. may be associated with more than one

nematode species (Akhurst and Boemare, 1990; Table 1). The nematode-bacterial

specificity appears to operate at two levels: the provision of essential nutrients for the

nematode by the bacterium and the retention of the bacterium within the intestine of the

Ws of the nematode (Akhurst and Boemare, 1990).

The requirement by the nematode of bacteria-produced nutrients does not impose

a high level of specificity for a particular bacteriai species, but nematodes generally

reproduce better on their specific bacterial symbiont (Akhurst, 1983; Akhurst and

Boemare, 1990; Aguillera et al., 1993). Apillera and Srnart (1993) reported that S.

scapterisci developed and npmduced on a number of bacterial species, including

Escherichia coli, Ochrobactemm unthropi, Paracoccus denitrifcans, Pseudomonas

aureofaciens, Pseudomonas fluorescens B iovar B. Xanthomonas maltophilia,

Xenorhabdus spp. and X. nematophilus, and that progeny production after 14 d was

significantly greater on X. nematophilus and P. fluorescens Biovar B than on the other

bacterial species. Akhurst (1983) hypothesized that since the association bctween the

nematode and bacteriai symbionts was not completely specific, it may be possible to

create a nematode - bacterium association that would be more effective against an insect

pest than any of the natural symbiotic associations.

Page 33: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

S ymbiont transmission is indirect in entornopathogenic nematodes since Us

acquire bacteria from their immediate environment, i.e. the insect cadaver (Wilkinson and

Hay, 1997). The production of antibiotics and bacteriocin, which inhibit the growth of

other microorgnnisms (Akhurst, 1982; Thaler et al., 1997; Li et al.. 1998), result in a

transmission strategy which is hinctionally analogous to vertical transmission (the

nematodes acquire their bacterial symbionts from their immediate environment) and

therefore, specificity and recognition may not be important (Wilkinson and Hay, 1997).

Specificity is high in the S. carpocapsue-X. nematophilus association and these Us do not

ntain the syrnbiont of any other species (Akhurst, 1983). However, Us of S. feltiae

(=bibiunis) and of S. glaseri are able to cany the symbionts of some other Steinemema

spp., though usually some of them do not carry these bacteria or cany fewer bacterial

cells than they do their natural associate (Akhurst, 1983). Poinar (1986) indicated that S.

(=Neoaplectana) glaseri has a greater ability to tolerate and even benefit from other

bacterial species than do other Steinernerna species, and hypothesized that this

characteristic linked it to a less-evolved condition. In fact, although both Xenorhabdur

spp. and Photorhabdus spp. have been isolated exclusively from their respective freshly

harvested U symbionts in nature, many other bactecial species and genera have been

reported to be associated with Steinemema spp. and Heterorhabditis spp., especially if

the nematodes have been maintained in culture for a long p e n d (Weiser, 1962; Poinar

and Thomas, 1965; Lysenko and Weiser, 1974; Botmare et al., 1983; Apillera et al*,

1993; Jackson et al., 1995).

Uniike the Steinememu - Xenorhbdus association, spccificity appears to be

greater in Heterorhabditis - Photorhubdus complex in both nutrient cequirement and in

Page 34: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

symbiont retention. Although various isolates of Heterorhabditis spp. have k e n cultured

on diets comprising bacteria derived from other heterorhabditid nematodes, many

experimental recombinations have been unsuccessful (Han et al., 1991; Gemtsen and

Smits, 1993, 1997). In some cases, even where growth and reproduction occumd, the Us

failed to retain the bacteria and the syrnbiosis has degenerated (Gerritsen and Smits,

1993).

The infection of an insect host by Us of the nematode is the beginning of the

tripartite nematode-bacterium-insect association (Fig. 1). The Us of the nematodes carry

the syrnbiotic bacteria in their intestine and use different foraging strategies to search for

a new insect host (Poinar et aL, 1980b; Poinar, 1990; Campbell and Gaugler, 1993). They

release the bacterial cells after entering the insect's hemocoel by way of natural openings

(spiracles, mouth and anus). In the case of Heterorhabditis, the Us may bore directly

through the insect cuticle. The syrnbiotic bacterial cells and nematode develop and

multiply, and together they kill the insect host usually within 24 - 48 h. The bacteria

provide nutrients for the nematode by breaking down insect tissue andor by acting as

food source themselves for the nematode, and by maintaining an optimal environment for

nematode development by producing different antimicrobial agents that rninimize the

competition from other micrmrganisrns (Dutky, 1959; Paul et al., 198 1). In this protected

environment, Steinemema continues to develop into amphimictic females and males

while Heterorhabdirs develops into a first generation of hermaphrodites (Poinar, 1990).

The subsequent, second generation of both Steinemenia and Heterorhabditis consists of

amphimictic females and males. Depending on the prevailing conditions in the insect

cadaver two or three generations of nematdes cm develop (Poinar. 1990). When the

Page 35: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 1. Generaîized life cycle of entomopathogenic nematdes,

Steinernema spp. and Heterorhabditk spp.

Page 36: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Us emerge frorn cadaver d

Us search for new host *

J 9

2nd andlor 3rd generation of Us enter host via nematodes fil1 the cadaver cuticle or openings

/ Bacterial symbiont

Host dies and both nematode and bacterial symbiont develop

Page 37: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

nutrient conditions become lirniting, an alternative developmental pathway leads to the

development of Us of the nematode. It is this U stage that emerges from the insect

cadaver and carries the bacterial symbiont to a new host to start a new infection cycle

(Poinar, 1 990).

In soil. the successfÙl infection of an insect host by the nematode - bacterial

complexes depends on many non-biotic and biotic factors. The nematodes and their

bacteria are subject to predation. parasitism and competition before they reach the insect

host. Some bacteria. fungi and invertebrates may negatively affect the soil population of

this mobile dispersal phase (Kaya and Koppenhofer, 1996). Even after gaining entry io

the host, the nematode-bacterium complexes may still face intra- or interspecific

competition. The intra-spccific competition within the insect host affects progeny

production of the entomopathogenic nematodes (Kaya and Koppenhofer, 1996). Both

field surveys and in vivo experiments have shown that two or more species of

entomopathogenic nematodes may occur simultaneously in the insect where they compete

for nutrients (Kondo, 1989; Stuart and Gaugler. 1994). The successful colonization of the

host appears to depend on inoculum size, development time of the nematodes, bacterial

symbiont and host species (Alatome-Rosas and Kaya, 1991; Boemare et al., 1997;

Koppenhofer and Kaya. 1996). Two different steinemematid spccies CO-infecting a host

have a potential to co-exist and develop because some steinemematids utilize the

bacterial symbionts of other steinemematids (Akhurst, 1983; Aguillera and Smart, 1993;

Koppenhofer and Kaya, 1996). However, the speed of development of the nematode and

the lower degree of specificity with the bacmial symbiont appcars to determine which of

the nematode species colonizing a cadaver will be successful (Kondo, 1989; Koppenhofer

Page 38: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

et al., 1995). When S. carpocapsue and H. bacteriophora CO-infected a host, S.

carpocupsae developed inside the cadavers in nearly d l cases (Alatorre-Rosas and Kaya,

1991). Perhaps heterorhabditid nematodes require mon time to release their symbiotic

bacteria than steinemematids (Alatorre-Rosas and Kaya, 199 1) or their bacterial symbiont

is inhibited by antibiotics or bacteriocins produced by bacterial symbionts of the

steinernematid (Akhurst, 1982; Boemare et al., 1993b; Thaler et al., 1997). Foraging

strategies of the Us influence the type of hosts encountered and therefore, influence inter-

specific competition between entomopathogenic nematodes. Although competition occurs

between entomopathogenic nematodes, two or more species of entomopathogenic

nematodes may successfully CO-exist in the soil by having different foraging strategies.

These strategies separate nematode species spatially and enable the nematodes to occupy

a different niche. This may result also in them having a clumped distribution (Kaya and

Koppenhofer, 1996).

These nematode - bacierium complexes interact with other nematode species in

the soil. Some mononchid and dorylaimid nematode species prey upon Steinemerna spp.

(Ishibashi and Kondo, 1986). These authon also reported that the addition of S. feltiae

DD-136 at 10,000 W l û û ml soil or S. glusen' at 2,500 IJsIlûû ml soil or in bark compost

samples caused a rapid decrease in the population density of the nematodes in the soil,

especially one week after application of the nematodes. However, these nematode

populations recovered or surpassed their initial levels within 1 to 8 weeks depending on

the nematode genus. Plant-parasitic nematodes, such as stubby-mot, ring, and spid

nematodes, were suppnssed significantly throughout the 8 week period, while rhabditids

increased several times above original level. The filtrate fkom a DD-136 nematode

Page 39: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

suspension (5 x 10 Us150 ml incubated overnight) did not affect 12s of M. incognita.

Consequently, the authors suspected that competition for space or habitat contributed to

the observed population changes of these other soil-living nematodes. Bird and Bird

(1986) observed a similar inhibitory effect of S. gluseri on Meloidogyne javanica in

potted tornato seedlings. The authors (Bird and Bird, 1986) proposed that suppression of

M. javanica by S. glaseri was due io competition for space or habitat of the nematodes

because the Us of S. glasen are much larger and more active than the J2s of M. javanica

and both species cluster around the root tips. Similar inhibitory effects of Us of

Steinernema spp. and Heterorhabditis spp. on plant-parasitic and saprophagous

nematodes, such as M. javanica. Heterodera schachtii and Caenorhabditis elegans have

been reported (Richardson and Grewal, 1991; Gouge et al., 1994; Lopez-Robles, 1996).)

This inhibitory effect of the entomopathogenic nematode Us on populations of

plant-parasitic nematodes has been noted following inundative application of Us in the

field (Georgis and Kelly, 1997). The infection of turfgrass, banana or potato in the field

by Meloidogyne spp., Belonolaimus longicaudatus, Criconernella spp., Pratylenchus spp.,

Rodopholus similus and Heterodera spp., was significantiy deminished after an

inundative application of entomopathogenic nematodes (Georgis and Kelly, 1997).

Consequently, the potential of entomopathogenic nematodes for controlling plant-

parasitic nematodes, as well as insect pests, has been considered. The mechanism of the

observed inhibitory effects on other nematodes is not clear. Geocgi and Kelly (1997)

proposed that the inhibitory effect may be due CO cornpetition for habitat, enhanced pny-

predator response, or involvement of the bacterial secondary metabolites released from

infected insect cadavers.

Page 40: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

In nature, many plants and rnicroorganisms produce substances toxic to

nematodes, and some of these substances also have other bioactivities (Chitwood, 1993;

Stadler et al., 1993; Betina, 1994; Anke and Sterner, 1997). A significant aspect of this

nematode - bacterium association of entomopathogenic nematodes is that the spbiotic

bacteria produce a variety of bioactive secondary metabolites, as has been shown in broth

cultures (Paul et al., 198 1 ; McInerney et al., 199 1 a, 199 1 b; Li et al., 1995a). The range of

these bioactive agents and their activities is summarized in Table 3.

The production of antibiotics by X. nemutophilus, a bacterial symbiont of

entomopathogenic nematode of the DD 136 strain of S. (=Neoaplectana) feltiae, was first

suggested by Dutky (1959). This antibiotic production is a cornmon property of

Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus species. Most species of bacterial symbionts that have

been studied produce antimicrobial components in broth cultun that inhibit the growth of

a variety of bacteria, yeasts and fungi, many of which are of medicinal and agricultural

importance (Paul et al., 198 1; Akhurst, 1982; McInemey et al., 199 la, 199 1 b; Li et al.,

1995a, 1997a). It is generally believed that the antibiotics are important in maintainhg an

optimal, cornpetitor-free environment for the development of the nematode and bacterial

symbiont (Dutky, 1959; Paul et al., 198 1). Once killed, the infected insect host is a target

for fun@ and other decay-inducing organisms €rom the soi1 or the insect gut. The

presence of the various broad-spectrum antibiotics pmduced by the bacterial symbiont

appear to help maintain optimal nutrient conditions, in part by inhibiting the build up of

populations of cornpetitors (Paul et al., 1981; Thaler et al., 1997). However, linle is

known about the occurrence of these antibiotic metabolites in nematode-infected insects

(Maxwell et al., 1994; Iarosz, 1996). Recently, the hypotbesis of antibiotic inhibition was

Page 41: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 3. Bioactive agents 85sociated with or derived h m the bacterial symbionts,

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., of eotomopatbogenic nematodes

Bioactive agents Bacterial sources Bioactivi ties* References

Xenor habdins

Xenorxides

Xenocoumacins

indole derivatives

Nematophin

Genistein

S tilbene derivatives

An thraquinone

derivatives

Phages

X. nematophilus

X, bovienii

X. bovienii

X. nemutophilus

Xenorhabdus sp.

Xe bovienii

Xe nematophilus

P. luminescens

P. luminescens

P. luminescens

X. nematophilus

X. bovienii

X. beddngii

P, luminescens

Photorhabdus spp.

1,2,4,5 McInemey et al., 199 1 a

Li et al,, 1995a

1,2,5 Chen, 1996; Xu, 1998

L2,3 Mcbemey et al., 199 1 b

1,2 Paul et al., 1981;

Li et al., 1995a

4 2 Chen, 1996

Li et al., 1997a, 1997b

1 Sztaricskai et al., 1992

1,2 Paul et al., 198 1

Li et al., 1995b;

Hu et al., 1998

1 Richardson et al., 1988

Sztiuicskai et al., 1992

Li et al., 1995b

Hu et al., 1998

1 Poinar et al., 1980a

Boemare et al., 1992;

Baghdipian et al., 1993

to be continued

Page 42: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 3. (continued)

Bacteriocins X. beddingii

X. bovienii

X. nenratopophikcs

Xenorhabdicin X. nematophilus

Chitinases X, bovienii

X. nematophilus

P. luminescens

Protein crystai X, bovienii

Exo-and endotoxins Xenorhabdus spp.

Photorhabdus spp.

1 Boemare et al., 1992;

Baghdipian et al., 1993

Thder et al., 1997

1 Thaier et al., 1995

2 Chen et al., 1996

1 Yudina and Egorov, 1996

4 Dunphy and Webster, 1988

Ensign et al., 1990

Bowen and Ensign, 1998

Gou et al., 1999

-.

*: 1 =antibiotic, 2=antimycotic. 3=antiulcer, kinsecticidal, S=antineoplastic. Note that

not every denvative of a bioactive agent possesses al1 listed bioactivities of that agent.

Page 43: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

questioned by Jarosz (1996). This author, based on a series of experiments, proposed that

a rapid and massive colonization of the insect body by symbiotic bacteria creates

unfavorable conditions for the growth and multiplication of bacterial (proteolytic)

contaminators, making the insect cadaver decay-resistant.

Our knowledge of the effect of the bacterial secondary metabolites on the insect

host (possibl y insecticidal), on competition among the prevailing bacterial species

(possibly antirnicrobial) and on the nutrition of the nematode spbiont has k e n

accumulating for decades. However, the possible involvement of these bacterial

metabolites in the symbiotic association between the nematodes and their associated

bacteria and in interactions between the nematode-bacterium complexes and other

organisms including soi1 nematodes is not fully known. In preliminary experiments, 1

showed that cultures of Xenorhabdw had nematicidal activity. Funher studies of this

nematicidal property were necessary in order to improve our understanding of the

symbiotic association between the nematodes and their bacterial symbionts and of the

interaction of the nematode-bacterium complexes with other organisms in the

environment. This could lead to improved in vitro production of the entornopathogenic

nematodes, better field efficacy when the nematode-bacterium complexes are applied as

biological control agents of insect pests and to the development of selective,

environmentally benign nematicides.

The objective of this study was to examine the nematicidai properties of the

metabolites of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. with particular refennce to their

chernical nature, nematicidal spectrum, in vitro and in vivo occurrence. biological roles

and their potential application.

Page 44: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CEINTER 2

GENEXAL MATERIAIlS AND METHODS

2.1 Sources of the nematdes and bacteria

Different species of entornopathogenic nematodes, Sleinemema spp. and

Heterorhabditis spp., were used in the snidy either for isolation of the symbiotic bacteria,

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., or for use in nematicidal and behavioral

bioassays. Al1 nematode and bacterial isolates and species used in the study were from the

laboratory collection of Dr. J. M. Webster (Department of Biological Sciences, Simon

Fraser University), and their initial sources are listed in Table 4.

2.2 Isolation, maintenance and culture of bacterial symbionts

Stock cultures of most bacteriai isolates fiom the entomopathogenic nematodes

that are listed in Table 4 were prepared previously by Dr. G. Chen (Welichem

Technology Corp., British Columbia) in Dr. J. M. Webster's laboratory. Photorhabdus

luminescens C9 was re-isolated fiom H. megidis 90 and P. luminescens MD was isolated

for the first time from Heterorhabditis sp. HMD.

To isolate the symbiotic bacteria P. luminescens C9 and P. luminescens MD, the

Us of their respective nematode symbionts, H. megidis 90 and Heterorhubditis sp. HMD

(Table 4), were collected separately fmm nematode-infected G. meilonella lame in Petri

dishes (Mracek and Webster, 1993). The Us were then allowed to pass through two layers

Page 45: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 4. Species and sources of nematodes and bacteria used in this study

Nematode Bacteria* Source of the

(species and isolates) (species and isolates) nematode isolates

Entomo~athogenic nematode-bacterium com~lexes

Steinernema carpocapsae Xenorhabdus nematophilus

B.J

DD136

Al1

BC 1

19

27

XQl

S. feltiae

A21

CH-S-MER

Dl

Al1

BC 1

19

27

ATCC 39497

X. bovienii

A2 I

Dr. H. Yang, Chinese Acad.

of Agriculture, Beijing, China

Dr. O. O. Poinar, Oregon

State University, USA

Biosys, Columbia, MD. USA

Soil sarnple: British

Columbia

Dr. W. M. Brooks, North

Camlina State University,

USA

Biosys, Columbia, MD, USA

American Type Culture

Collection, MD, USA

Soil sample: Memt, British

Columbia

Dr. J. M. Grunder, Swiss

Federal Research Station,

Waàenswil, Switzerland

to be continued

27

Page 46: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 4 (continued)

S. glaseri

NC19

S. glaseri

S. kushriiai

S. puertoricense

Heterorhabdilir sp.

HMD

Heterorhabditis sp.

Spain

H. bacteriophora

Oswego

H. mare la tus

H. megidis

90

Photorhabdus luminescens

MD

Photorhabdus sp.

Spain

P. luminescens

Oswego

Photorhabdus sp.

P. luminescens

c9

Dr. K. H. Kaya, University of

California, Davis, USA

Dr. K. H. Kaya

Dr. Yam;rkita, Forestry and

Forest Research Institute,

Tsukuba, Ibaraki, Iapan

Dr. J. Roman, Agiculturd

University of Puerto Rico,

Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico

Dr. R. Gordon, Mernorial

University, Newfoundland

Dr. 2. Mracek, Czech Acad.

of Science, Ceske

Budejovice, Czech Republic

Dr. 2. Mracek

Dr, E. S. Shields, Corne11

University, Ithaca, W. USA

Dr. R. E. Berry, Oregon State

University, Corvallis, USA

Soi1 sample: Sumerland,

British Columbia

to be continued

Page 47: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 4 (continued)

Bacteriai-feedine nematode

Caenorhabdiris elegans (wild type)

Fun~al-feedine; andor dant-parasitic nematodes

Ap helenchoides rhytium

Bursaphelenchus xylophilus

BC

BI mucronatus

French

Obliaate plant-oatasitic nematode

Meloidogyne incognita

Dr, D. L. Ballie, Simon

Fraser University, British

Columbia

Dr, R. V, Anderson,

Agriculture and Agri-food

Canada, Ottawa

Dr. R. V, Anderson, conifer

tree, British Columbia

Dr. R. V, Anderson,

conifer tree, Quebec

Dr, G. de Guiran,

Stade Res. de

Nematol. et de Genetique

Moleculaire des Invert.,

Antibes, France

Dr. I. W. Potter, Agriculture

and Agri-food Canada,

Vineland Station, Ontario

--

*: Spbiotic bacteria were isolated fiom their respective nematode symbionts.

29

Page 48: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

of wet-strength (WS) paper tissue (Kimwipesa , Kimberly-Clark Corp., USA) to ensure

that only active Us were collected. They were surface sterilized by immersion in 0.2%

thimerosal for 2 h and washed four times with phosphate-bufîered saline (PBS) (Dunphy

and Webster, 1984). They were then homogenized, and the suspension was streaked ont0

tryptic soy agar (TSA) Oifco), containing 25 mg of the dye bromothymol blue pet liter

(TSAD), and incubated at 25OC in the dark. After 48 h, typical, isolated pnmary form

colonies of the bacteria on the plate were selected and colonially purified on TSAD

plates. The identity of the bacteria was confinned by their morphologicd, biochernicai

and physiological characteristics (Thomas and Poinar. 1979; Akhurst, 1980; Boemare and

Akhurst, t 988).

For long term storage of the bacterial cultures, 48 h-old prirnary form colonies of

P. luminescens C9 and P. luminescens MD grown separately on TSA plates were

removed and suspended in 128 sterilized sucrose solution, which was then freeze-dried

and stored at -20°C. Freeze-dry powders of other bacterial isolates used in the study were

prepared previously by Dr. G. Chen. For routine maintenance of the bacterial cultures, the

powder of the freeze-dried stock cultures of the bactena was inoculated separately ont0

TSA or TSAD plates, then subcultured weekly on TSA or TSAD plates. Cultures were

discarded once they had been subcultured eight tiws.

Broth cultures of the bacteria were prepared as described below. A loophil of a 48

h-old bacterial culture grown on a TSA or TSAD plate w u inoculated into an Erlenmeyer

flask containing tryptic soy broth (TSB) (Difco) (50 ml in 125 ml flask or 100 ml in 200

ml flask). The flask was shaken on a gyratory shaker at 150 rpm for 24 h in the dark

(25OC) to prduce the seed culture. Different quantities of the seed culhm broth (1 or 1 0

Page 49: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

ml), depending on the experiments, were added to new flasks containing TSB, Luria

broth base (LB) (Miller, Sigma), or nutrient broth (NB) (Difco) (50 ml medium in 125 ml

flask or 8 0 ml medium in 2 L flask) and shaken as described above for 1 to 5 d.

To prepare the cell-free (CF) culture filtrate, the bacterial culture broth was

centrihiged (13,000 g, 10 min at 4OC) and the supernatant was then filter sterilized (0.2

pm pore size) (MiIlipore@, Millipore Products Division, Bedford, MA, USA).

Al1 bacterial tram fer and maintenance was conducted under standard, sterile

conditions, and the bacterial cultures either in solid or liquid medium were incubated at

25'C in the dark, unless otherwise stated.

2.3 Maintenance and culture of nematodes

Al1 entomopathogenic nematodes were maintained in the laboratory at room

temperature by passaging through last-instar G. mellonella larvae, which were supplied

by the Insectary of the Department of Biological Sciences, Simon Fraser University.

Infective juveniles of the nematodes were collected in a water trap in a Petri dish within 2

to 4 d of their emergence from the infected G. mellonella cadavers (Mracek and Webster,

1993). Only those active Us that passed through two layers of the WS paper tissue were

collected. These Us were washed several times with distilled water and the excess water

was removed with a pipette. The collected Us were either surface sterilized as described

above or not treated further. niey were then concentrated to the desind density in

sterilized distilled (SD) water or distilled water befon use, by nmoving excess water

with a pipette.

Page 50: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Bacterial-feeding nematodes, C. elegans, were cultured on freshly prepared

Escherichia coli culture growing on NGM medium (Sulston and Hodgkin, 1988) in Petri

dishes at room temperature. Fourth-stage juveniles (J4s) and adults of the nematode were

washed from the surface of the plates and rinsed thoroughly with SD water. They were

then concentrated to the desired concentration in sterilized M9 buffet (Sulston and

Hodgkin, 1988) by removing the excess buffer solution with a pipette.

Fungal-feeding andlor plant-parasitic nematodes, A. rhythm and Bursupitelenchus

spp., were cultured separately on freshly prepared fungal cultures of Botrytis cinerea

grown on potato dextrose agar (PDA) in Petri dishes (2S°C) (Ishikawa et al.. 1986).

Mixed populations (mainly J4s and adults) of the nematodes were washed from

condensation water on the covers of the Petri dishes, and passed through two layea of

WS paper tissue so as to collect only active nematodes. These nematodes were then

concentrated in distilled water by removing surplus water with a pipette before use.

The obligate plant-parasitic nematode, M. incognita, was maintained on potted

tomato plants, Lycopersicon esculentum (cv. Rutgers; seeds courtesy of Dr. K. R. Barker,

University of North Carolina. USA) in the greenhouse. Hand picked egg sacs of a golden

to light brown color were immersed in shallow water (-2 mm) at 2S°C in the dark, and

only those J2s that hatched from the eggs after the first 24 h and before the 8th d were

collected daily and rinsed thoroughly with distilled water or SD water before use.

Al1 nematode sarnples listed above were used in experiments immediately after

their appropriate preparation from their respective cultures.

Page 51: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

2.4 Bioassays for nematicidai activity

2.4.1 Activity of cell-free culture filtrates

The test CF filtrate, either original strength or diluted with SD water, was added to

a small, sterile Petri dish (10 x 35 mm, ComingO) with 10 pi (5 pg/N ) streptomycin

sulfate (SMS, Sigma) (Otopro et al., 1988) solution, and into this was added a 20 pl

nematode (- 100 nematodes) suspension to make 1 ml of final test solution. The dish was

sealed with Parafilm and mortality of the nematodes was checked as described below

after 24 h incubation of the dish at 2S°C in the dark. The culture medium, either original

strength or diluted to a strength similar to that of the test filtrate, was adjusted to the same

pH as that of the test filtrate using 6N HCl or 6N NaOH. It was then filter sterilized and

tested similariy to serve as the control. The control also contained 10 pl (5 pg/pl ) SMS.

The above procedure was conducted under standard, sterile conditions.

2.4.2 Activity of metabolic compounds

Depending on the solubility of the test compound or mixture of compounds and

on the toxicity of the solvents to the test nematodes, the pure compound or crude mixture

was first dissolved in a selected type and quantity of a solvent, such as dimethyl

sulphoxide (DMSO), polyethylene glycol (PEG), ethanol or methanol, and diluted with

distilled water so as to form the stock solution. Different arnounts of the freshly pnpared

stock solution, depending on the experirnent, were added separately to the small Petri

dishes (10 x 35 mm) and further diluted with distilled water. Then, 20 pl of nematode

suspension (-100 nematodes) was added to the solution in the Petri dish to make 1 ml of

fuial test solution in each dish. The mortality of the test nematodes was determined as

Page 52: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

described below after 24 h incubation of the dish at 2S°C in the dark. Control dishes

contained only the solvent at the highest concentration used in the test solutions.

2.4.3 Mortality of the test nematodes

Mortality of the nematodes in test solutions was determined under the

stereomicroscope (25 x). The nematodes that were immobile and did not response when

probed repeatedly with a fine bnstle were considered dead and those that were immobile

but responded when prokd were considered paralyzed with temporarily impaired

mobility (see also Mcleod and Khair, 1975; Birch et al., 1993; Atta-Ur-Rahman et al..

1997). These criteria were confirmed in preliminary tests where none of the

nonresponding nematodes revived following subsequent transfer to aerated water for up

to 24 h.

2.4.4 Antibacterial activity

An agar diffusion test (Hewitt and Vincent, 1989) was used during the process of

isolating the metabolites from the bacterial cultures to detect the antibiotic metabolites. A

100 pi spore suspension of Bacillus subtilis (3.3 x 109/ml) was pipetted ont0 a TS A plate,

and evenly spread over the surface of the plate with a stenle spreader. The plate, with the

lid open, was then dried in a sterile laminar-tlow hood for about 10 min. Four to six

wells (diameter of 5 mm eadi) were made in the inoculated agar medium in the plate

using a sterilized glass tuk, and the agar plugs wen nmoved Then 30 pl solution of the

test compound, which was fimi dissolved in methanol, was added to each well. The plate

was covered and incubated at 3S°C over night. The size of the clear zones around the

Page 53: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

wells in the B. subtilis plates was a measure of the strength of the activity of the test

compound.

2.5 Statisticai analysis

Each expriment in this study had at least three replicates for each treatment and

the experiment was npeated at least once unless othewise stated. Experimental data

were expressed as means I standard errors. The data were analyzed using Proc Mixed

(SAS, SAS hstitute hc., Gary, NC) to determine whether there were significant

differences in treatments. and a Bonferroni correction was used to detect significant

diffennce (P < 0.05) between treatment means.

Page 54: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CHAPTER 3

NEMATICIDAL PROPERTIES

OF IN VITRO CüLTURES OF THE B A C T E U

3.1 Introduction

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdw spp. are well known for their ability to

produce insecticidal and antimicrobial substances in cultun broth (Table 3). These

metabolites are believed to play an important roie in the nematode-bacterium-insect

association (Dukty. 1959; Paul et al., 198 1; Bowen et al., 1998). In preliminary

experiments, 1 discovered that the culture broths of Xenorhabdus had nematicidai

properties (Chapter 1). Since nothing was reported about the nematicidal properties of the

metabolites produced by Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., many questions

arose. For exarnple, is the nematicidal activity only an occasional or constant, cornmon

property of the in vitro bacterial cultures of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp.?

How do the culture conditions affect nematicidal activity of the bacterid cultures? To

answer some of these questions and aiso to establish a foundation for further study of the

nematicidal properties of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., the following

experiments were done to investigate: 1) the nematicidal activity of in vitro cultures of

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp.; 2) the infiuence of bacteriai culture conditions

on nematicidal activity of the bacterial cultures; 3) the nematicidai activity of the organic

and aqueous fractions of the bacterial cultures and 4) to investigate the nematicidal

activity of some known antibiotics produced by Xenorhabdus spp.

Page 55: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

3.2 Materials and methods

3.2.1 Bacteria and nematodes

The following bacterial strains, X. nematophilus All, BCl, Dl, 19, 27 and ATCC

39497, X. bovienii A2 1 and P. iuminescens C9 and MD (Table 4), were used in a series of

experiments. The bacteria were maintained and cultured as described in section 2.2 or

section 3.2.2.

Two economically important species of plant-parasitic nematodes, root-hot

nematode. M. incognita, and pine-wood nematode, B. xylophilus BC, were used as test

nematodes in the nematicidai bioassays in this study. Meioidogyne incognita is an

obligate plant-parasitic nematode that has a wide host range and is a major cause of lower

crop yields worldwide (Sasser and Carter, 1985). Bursaphelenchus xylophilus is both a

plant-panisitic and hingal-feeding nematode that caused multimillion dollar loses to pine

forests, especially in some Asian countries (Mamiya, 1984; Sutherland and Webster,

1993). These test nematodes were cultured and prepared as described in section 2.3. They

were collected, washed thoroughly with SD water and concentrated to the appropriate

density (- 100 nematoded20 pi water) before use.

3.2.2 Preparation of cell-f~e filtrates

Seed cultures of each bacterial strain wen prepared separately by adding a loopful

of the respective, 48 hsld bacteriai culture grown on TSA or TSAD plates to a conical

flask (125 ml) containing 50 ml TSB. The flasks were shaken at 150 rpm on a gyratory

shaker at 25OC for 24 h in the dark. One rnilliliter of the seed culhire was then pipetted

into each of three new conicai flasks containing 50 ml TSB, and the flasks were shaken as

Page 56: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

above for 4 d. The 4 d-old culture broth from each of the three flasks was centnfuged

(13,000 g, 4OC, 10 min) separately and filter sterilized to obtain the CF filtrates. The CF

filtrates of each strain were then tested, either undiluted or diluted with SD water, for

nematicidal bioassays.

Al1 experiments involving CF filtrates were conducted under standard. sterile

conditions, and 10 pl SMS solution was added to each test solution to prevent possible

bacterial contamination. Culture media containing the same quantity of SMS was tested

similarly and served as the control.

3.2.3 Nematicidal activity of bacterial strains and species

To investigate the nematicidal activity of different strains of Xenorhabdus spp.

and Photorhabdus spp. when cultured in vitro, the CF filtrates of each bacterial strain

were prepared as described above. They were tested either undiluted or diluted (114

strength of the original CF filtrates). In the undiluted tests, a 20 pl suspension (-100

nematodes) of J2s of M. incognita wûs added to 970 fl CF filtrate and 10 pl SMS

solution in a small Petri dish (35 x 10 mm). For the diluted test, 250 pi CF filtrate, 10 pi

SMS solution and 20 pi suspension of J2s of M. incognita were added to 720 p i SD water

in a small Petri dish to make 1.0 ml final test solution. The dishes were sealed with

Parafilm, incubated in the dark for 24 h, and the nematicidal activity was examined under

the ste~ornicroscope (25 X ) as described in section 2.4. Tryptic soy broth, containing

10 pl SMS solution and adjusted to the same pH as that of the test filtrates, was filter

sterilized and served as the control.

Page 57: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

3.2.4 Nematicidal activity of the bacterial cultures against different nematode species

To evaluate any differential nematicidai effect on two species of nematodes,

diluted CF filtrates (112 or 114 strength of the original CF filtrates) of X. bovienii A21, X.

nematophilup BCI and P. luminescens MD were prepared as described above and tested

against J2s of M. incognita and J4s and adults of B. xylophilus BC. Tryptic soy broth,

containing 10 pi SMS solution and adjusted to the same pH as that of the test filtrates,

was filter sterilized and served as the control.

3.2.5 Influence of bacterial culture conditions on nematicidal activity of the culture

filtrates

3.2.51 Culture media

To investigate whether the type of cultun media used influence nematicidal

activity of the bacterial culture, 4 d-old CF filtrates of X. nematophilus BCI grown on

TSB, NB and LB media, three commonly used culture media for Xenorhabdus spp. and

Photorhabdus spp. (Thomas and Poinar, 1979; Li et al., 1995b). were prepared as

described in section 3.2.2. The nematicidal activity of these CF filtrates (at 112 and 114

strength of the original filtrates) was tested, as described in section 3.2.3, against J2s of

M. incognita and J4s and adults of B. xylophilus. Tryptic soy broth, NB and LB media,

containing 10 pi SMS solution and adjusted to the same pH as that of the test filtrates,

was filter sterilized and served as the controls.

3.2.5.2 Age of the bacterial culture

To determine whether the aematicidal activity is related to the age of the bacterial

Page 58: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

culture, X. bovienii A2 I , X. nematophilus BC 1 and P. luminescens MD, were cultured as

described above in section 3.2.2 for up to 5 d. Three flasks of bacterial culture of each

species were taken randomly every day from the shaker, and the CF filtrates were

prepared separately. The diluted CF filtrates (114 strength of the original filtrates) were

tested against I2s of M. incognitcr as described in section 3.2.3. There were three

replicates for each treatment. Tryptic soy broth, containing 10 pl SMS solution and

adjusted to the sarne pH as that of the test filtrates, was filter sterilized and served as the

control,

Bacterial growth and pH change of the culture broths also were monitored daily.

At each sampling tirne 1 ml broth was taken from each of the above three flasks of each

bacterial species and diluted ten fold with TSB. The absorbance of the bacterial

suspensions was then measund immediately at 600 nm on a Milton 3000

spectrophotorneter. Cell-free culture filtrate, diluted ten fold from that of the culture

broth, served as the control. The pH of the broth in each of the three flasks of each

bacterial species was measured directly using a pH meter (mode1 32 1. Coming O).

3.2.5.3 pH of the culture broth

To investigate whether the pH of the culture broth influenced the nematicidal

activity of the CF filtrates against M. incognita, the pH of the 4 d-old CF filtrates of X.

bovienii A21 and X. nematophilus %Cl was adjusted with 6N HCl and/or 6N NaOH to

pH 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9, respectively. The filtrates were then filter sterilized and their

nematicidal activity against J2s of M. incognita were tested, as described in section 3.2.2.

Page 59: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

TSB medium (pH 7.2, Difco) alone was adjusted similarly to pH 5, 6. 7, 8 and 9. filter

sterilized and semed as control.

To hirther investigate the effect of extreme pH of the test solution on 12s of M.

incognita and J4s and adults of B. nylophilus, buffer solutions at pH 10.0 (VWRB) and

pH 5.0 (Fisher@) were each diluted with distilled water to 1/30 of their original

concentration. The nematicidal activity of the diluted buffer solutions was tested against

the two nematode species as described in section 2.4. Buffer solution (pH 7.0, VWR@)

was diluted and tested similarly to serve as a control.

3.2.6 Nematicidal activity of organic and aqueous fractions of the culture filtrates

To provide information on the chernical nature of the nematicidal metabolites

mising from the culture filtrates, the organic and aqueous fractions of the bacterial culture

of each species were obtained as described below. The 4 d-old culture broths of X.

bovienii A2 1. X. nematophilus BC 1 and ATCC 39497 and P. luminescens C9 and MD

were prepared as described in section 3.2.2. The broth frorn the three flasks of each of the

five bacterial strains was cornbined into five batches and centrifuged (13.000 g, 10 min at

4OC) to obtain the respective supernatanu. nie filter-sterilized supmatant of each

bacterial strain was extracted separately in a separating hinnel with an equal volume of

ethyl acetate four times for 30 min each. The extracts of the same supernatant for each

bacterial culture were combined and dried under vacuum at 30°C on a rotary evaporator

to obtain the organic fraction for each culture. The remaining liquid fraction in each of

the separating funnels after ethyl acetate extraction was separately freeze-dned to obtain

the comsponding aqueous fraction.

Page 60: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

The organic and aqueous fractions of each bacterial culture were tested for their

nematicidal activity agahst J4s and adults of B. xylophilus and JZs of M. incognitu. The

test solutions of the organic fractions were prepared by dissolving the extracts in either

DMSO and diluted with distiiled water to 2,000 pglml (5% DMSO, v/v), for the test

against B. xylophilus, or in DMSO and Triton X-100 and diluted with distilled water to

1,000 p g l d (1% DMSO plus 1% Triton X-100, v/v), for the test against M. incognita.

Into 980 pl of the test solution in a small Petri dish (35 x 10 mm) was added 20 pl

nematode suspension of J4s and adults of B. xylophilur BC or J2s of M. incognita to

make 1 ml test solution. There were three replicates for each treatment. The dishes were

sealed, incubated for 24 h and the mortality of the nematodes checked as described in

section 2.4.

To pnpare the test solution of the aqueous fraction. the freeze-dned material was

dissolved and diluted with distilled water to the sarne concentration of TSB as original

culture (27.5 mg /ml; Difco) in which the bacteria had grown. The solution was then filter

sterilized and tested against J2s of M. incognita and J4s and adults of B. xylophilus as

described in section 2.4. Tryptic soy broth that had the pH adjusted with 6 N HCI or 6 N

NaOH, comsponding to thot of the aqueous fractions, was filter sterilized and served as

control.

3.2.7 Nematicidal activity of some known antibiotics pmduced by Xenorhabdus spp.

A few of the antibiotics isolated from cultures of some other microorganisms

(e.g. Lechnm papyracewn and Penicillium brejèIdianum) have been found to be dso

nematicidal (Stadler et al., 1993; Anke and Stemer, 1997). Consequentiy, a test was done

Page 61: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

to determine the possible nematicidal activity of some known antibiotics produced by

Xenorhabdw spp. and Photorhabdur spp. in broth cultures. The antibiotics tested were

xenorhabdins L and 3 (Xu, 1998), xenorxides 1 and 2 (Li et al., 1998), indole derivatives

1- 4 (Paul et al., 198 1 ; Li et al., 1995a) and nematophin (Li et al., 1997a). Xenorhabdins

1 and 3 were prepared by the method descnbed by Xu (1998) and the rest of the

antibiotics were kindly supplied by Dr. I. Li (JR laboratones uic., Btitish Columbia) and

Dr. G. Chen.

Test solutions of each of these antibiotics were prepared by dissolving each of

them in the specified solvent and diluting them with distilled water to a concentration of

200, 500 or 1,000 pgfml. For testing against J4s and adults of B. xylophilus, the solvent

was DMSO (5%, vfv) or DMSO (5%) plus Ttiton X-100 (ln, vfv). For the test against

J2s of M. incognito, the solvent was DMSO (146, v/v) plus Triton X-100 ( 1 %, v/v).

Nematicidal activity was examined as described in section 2.4. DMSO solution or the

solution of the DMSO plus Triton X-100 mixture at the same concentration as that in the

test solutions, served as controls.

3.3 Results

3.3.1 Nematicidal activity of bacterial strains and species

The CF filtrates of dl bacterial svains and species tested showed nematicidal

activity against J2s of M. incognito, but the activity varied depending on the

concentration of the CF filmte and on the strains and species of the bacteria from which

the CF filtrates onginated. DiIuted CF filtrates (diluted to haif strength) of the Merent

bacterial cultures caused 100% mortality of J2s of M. incognita. Howcver, when diluted

Page 62: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

to 114 strength, the filtrates of different isolates and species of the bacteria caused

mortality ranging from 2.4 to 96.3% and paraiysis fiom 3.7 to 75.9% (Fig. 2). Higher

percentage mortality of M. incognita was caused by CF filtrates ( 1/4 strength) of BC 1, D 1

and 27 isolates than by other isolates tested (P < 0.05). Diluted TSB (diluted to 1/4

strength) did not cause any nematode rnortality or paralysis (Fig.2).

3.3.2. Nematicidal activity of different cultures against different nematode species

CF filtrates of X. bovienii A2 1, X. nematophilus BC 1 and P. luminescens MD,

respectively, showed nematicidal activity against both M. incognita and B. xylophilus

(Table 5). in general, the bacteriai culiures were more active against M. incognita than B.

xylophilus. As well, the culture filtrate of P. luminescens MD was more active against B.

xylophilus than that of Xenorhnbdus spp. (P < 0.05).

3.3.3. Influence of bacterial culture conditions on filtrate nematicidal activity

The media composition of the bacteriai cultures infiuenced the nematicidal

zictivity of the culture filtrate (Table 6). Of the three media used. the culture filtrates of X.

nematophilus BCl grown in TSB and LI3 showed significantly stronget activity against

M. incognita than that grown in NB (P < 0.05).

The percentage mortality of 12s of M. incognita increased gradually as the age of

the bacterial cultures increased over a 5 d period (Fig. 3). At u r h sampling time,

CF filtrates of X. nematophilus BC1 showed significantly stronger activity than did the

other filtrates against J2s of M. incognita and P. luminescens MD had the least activity.

Page 63: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 2. Percentage mortality and paralysis of second stage juveniles of Meloidogyne

incognita enrpod to diluted, cell-Cree culture filtrates (4 dsld filtnted culture

diluted to Y4 strength) of Xenorhubdus spp. and Photorhabdus luminescens. C:

control; Ml: isolate of Xenorhabdus bovienii; 19, 27, AU, ATCC, BC1 and Dl:

isolates of X. nemutophitus; C9 and MD: isolates of Phdorhabdus luminescens. n=6

except for Mates 19,27, Al1 and Dl where n d Bars represcnt standard errors of

the means.

Page 64: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 65: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 5. Percentage mortality of second stage juvenües of Melocdugyne incugnita

(MI) and fourth stage juveniies anà adults of Bursuphelenchus xgloplilus BC (BX)

exposeà to the düuted, celi-frec culture liltrates (4-d old filtrated culture and diluted

to i l 2 or î/4 strength) of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorkabdus luminescens

Bactenalspecies Strains Dilution Mortality (95)

X. bovienii A2 i 112

X. nematophilur BC 1 112

P. luminescens MD 112

X. bovienii A2 L 114

X. nematophilus BC 1 1 /4

P. luminescens MD 1 /4

Controls (TSB)*

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=6). Means in the same column followed by the same

letter are not significantiy different (P c 0.05).

*Diluted TSB (diluted to 112 or 114 of strength); pH of each control was adjusted to the

same pH as the corresponding CF filtrates of each bacterial culture.

Page 66: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 6. Percentage mortality of second stage juvedes of Melouiogyne incognita

(MI) exposed to the diluted, cell-free culture filtrates (4 dsld liltrated culture and

diluted to V2 or Y4 strength) of Xenorhubdus nemutophilus BC1 grown in tryptk

soy broth (TSB), Luria broth (LB) and nutrient broth (NB), respectively

Cell-free filtrates Dilutions Mortality (I)

TSB

LB

NB

TSB

LB

NB

TSB

LB

NB

- -

Data are expressed as mems f SE (n= 6). Means followed by the sarne letter are not

sipificantly different (P < 0.05).

*: pH adjusteci to the highest level(9.0).

Page 67: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 3. (a) Growth, (b) pH and (c) nematicidal activity against Meloidogyne

incognüu (second stage juveniles) of Xenorhabdus bovienii A21 (AZl), X.

nematophilus BC1 @Cl) and Photorhabdus luminescens MD (MD). Measurements

taken over time following the culture of these bacteria on tryptic soy broth. Bars

represent standard m o r s of the nieoas.

Page 68: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

O 1 2 3 4 5 6

Age of the batcrial cultures (days)

Page 69: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

X. nematophilus BCl and P. luminescens MD grew rapidly during the first 2 d but

thereafter the growth rate declined whereas X. bovienii A21 had a relatively low growth

rate (Fig. 3). Of the three bactena tested. X. nematophilus BCI had the pa t e s t ce11

density over the whole time period. The pH of al1 three bactehl cultures increased

gradually over 5 d (Fig 3), and the pH of the bacterial cultures at 5 d ranged from 8.5 to

8.9.

The nematicidal activity of the pH-adjusted bacterial filtrates increased with the

pH of the culture filtrates (Table 7). The higher the pH of the CF filtrates, the stronger the

nematicidal activity. However, when pH of the CF filhates were adjusted to below 7.0

there was no nematode monality of the filtrates, but there was still some percentage (- O -

30%) of nematode paralysis. Tryptic soy broth itself was not toxic to the nematode

whether its pH wu adjusted to 5.0 or 8.5. but it became toxic to the nematode when its

pH value was adjusted to 9.0 (Table 7).

The J2s of M. incognita and J4s and adults of B. xylophilus BC survived higher

(pH 10.0) or lower pH (pH 5.0) conditions in the buffer solutions for 24 h with no

monality, which indicates that higher pH itself was not a lethal factor against the

nematodes in CF filtrates or in the TSB controls that had been adjusted to pH 9.0.

3.3.4 Nematicidal activity of the organic and aqueous fractions of the bacterial cultures

The organic fractions of al1 five bacteriai cultures tested showed nematicidal

activity against J4s and adults of B. qdophilus BC but not against J2s of M. incognita and

dl aqueous fiactions that had been fmze-dried were inactive against both M. incognita

and B. xylophilus (Table 8).

Page 70: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Tabk 7. NematicidPI activity of the 4 d-old roll-free filtrates of Xenorhubdus

kvienii A21 (Ml) and X. nematophilus BCl @Cl) a g h t second stage juvedes of

MeIoidogyne inmgnita (MX) when the Ntrates were adjusted, usfng 6N NaOH or 6N

HCl, to pH values ranging from 5.0 to 9.0

Adjusted pH values

of the cell-free filtrates

A2 1 BC I TSB (control)

O* O O t O O I O

O * O O I O Of0

45.9I0.8 98.7f1.3 O f 0

100 * 0 100 f 0 Of0

nt nt O f O

100 f O l o f 0 1 O O I O

- - - -

Data are expressed as means i SE (n=3).

nt: not tested.

Page 71: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 8. Nematicidai activity of dried organic and aqueous fractions of

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus luminescens against second stage juveniles of

Meloidogyne incognüa 0 and fourth stage j u v e n k and adults of

Bursuphelenchus xylophilus BC (BX)*

Bacterid cultures Nematicidal activity

Organic fractions Aqueous fractions

X. bovienii

A2 1 O + O O

X. nematophilus

BC 1 O ++ O nt

ATCC 39497 O + O O

P. luminescens

C9 nt + O O

MD nt + O O

-------- Controls

Solvents O O nt nt

TSB nt nt O O

*: The organic fractions were tested up to 1,000 pglml and aqueous fractions tested at

27,000 pg/d (=2.75% as in TSB control).

O: No activity. +: moderate nematicidai activity (percentage moriality < 50%). tt: strong

nematicidd activity (percentage mortaiity > 50%). nt: not tested n=3.

Page 72: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

3.3.5 Nematicidal activity of some known antibiotics produced by Xenorhabdus spp.

None of the tested antibiotics showed nematicidal activity against 14s and adults

of B. xylophilus under the prevailing expecimental conditions (Table 9).

3.4. Discussion

The results demonstrate that nematicidal activity is a common properiy of

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. when they are cultured in vitro. Al1 tested

strains and species of the bacteria showed nematicidal activity against 12s of M. incognita

and J4s and adults of B. xylophilus. However, the activity varied with the bacterial strains

and species. CF filtrate of X. nemutophilus BCI, for example. caused nearly 100%

mortdity of J2s of M. incugnifa even when the filtrate was diluted four times, but the CF

filtrate of X. nematophilus 19 was not lethai when similariy diluted (Fig. 2).

Nematicidal activity of the bacterial CF Filtrate was significantly infiuenced by the

nature of the culture medium in which the bacteria had been grown. This difference in

nematicidal activity may result from differential bacterial growth, which may influence

qualitatively andlor quantitatively the secondary metabolites and, consequently, influence

the nematicidal activity of the bacterial cultures. The diffennce may also result from

differential activity of the metabolic pathways of the bacterium in different culture media.

It was reported that pH influences the nematicidal activity of test solutions in vitro

(Banage and Visser, 1965; Cayrol et al., 1989). The same is tme for bacterial cultures of

Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhbdus spp. In general, for the same bacterid isolate the

higher the pH of the bacterial cultures, the stronger the nematicidal activity. The

Page 73: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 9. Nematicidal activity of some known antiblotics producd by Xenorhabdus

spp. when tested against fourth stage juveniles and adults of Bursuphelenchus

xy Ioph ilus

Bacteria

-

Antibiotics The maximum Mortality

concentration (%)

tested (pg/ml)

X. bovienii

A2 i

X. nematophilus

BC1

ATCC 39497

indole derivative 1 1,000

indole derivative 1 +2 1,000

indole denvative 3 1,000

indole derivative 4 1,000

xenomide I 500

xenomide 2 250

nematophin 1

xenorbabdin 1 500

xenorhabdin 3 500

Page 74: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

relationship between the pH of the filtrates and their nematicidal activity was

demonstrated by the pH re-adjustment expriment. The nematicidal activity of the CF

filtrates against M. incognita decreased dramaticaily with decreasing pH of the filtrates,

especially at pH lower than 7.0. The results suggest that a major nematicidal metabolite is

either stable only under basic conditions or is itseif an alkaline substance.

The culture medium and pH may contribute to the total nematicidal activity of a

filtrate. When the pH of TSB was adjusted to 9.0, it became toxic to the nematodes

(Table 7), but neither TSB (pH 7.2 at original state) nor a buffer solution at pH 10.0

(section 3.3.3) caused any rnortality of the nematodes. The nsults indicate a synergistic,

toxic effect between high pH and TSB that contributed to the total nematicidal activity of

the filtrates.

The loss of nematicidal activity against M. incognita by both the organic fraction

and the freeze-dried aqueous fractions was puuling, because CF filtrates of Xenorhabdus

spp. and Photorhabdus spp. showed strong nematicidal activity against this species

(Tables 5 to 9; Figs. 2 and 3). The results imply thrt some active nemdcidal

metabolite(s) was lost or denatured dunng solvent extraction and the freeze-drying

process.

The results of these in vitro tests suggest that metabolites andfor factors that may

differ between species exist in the CF filtrates that are nematicidal. Firstly, the CF filtrate

of P luminescens MD showed stronger activity against B. xyhphilus than did that of X.

bovienii A21 or X. nematophilus BCI. though it had less activity than that of X.

nematophilus BCl against M. incognita. These observations support the concept of there

k i n g more than one nematicidal agent in the fütntcs and that they vary with bacterial

Page 75: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

species. Secondly, CF filtrates of Xenorhabdus spp. were more active against J2s of M.

incognita than against the J4s and adults of B. xylophilus (Table 5). However, both the

organic and the freeze-dried aqueous fractions were inactive against J2s of M. incognita

but the organic fractions were still active against B. xylophilus under test conditions

(Table 8). These observations, together with pH related nematicidal activity and the

synergistic and toxic effect between pH and TSB, suggest that the overall nematicidal

activity of the CF filtrates is a result of complicated interactions involving multiple

metabolites andior factors.

In conclusion, the nematicidal activity of the cultures of Xenorhabdus spp. and

Photorhabdus spp was demonstrated. The activity was related to the type of the culture

media and to the age and pH value of the cultures. Of the three media used, the CF filtrate

of bacteria grown in TSB showed the strongest activity, and this activity increased

gradually over 5 d. Overall, the higher the pH of the cultures, the stronger the nematicidal

activity. Organic fractions of the bacterial cultures were active against B. xylophilus but

not M. incognita, and the f~eze-dried aqueous fraction were inactive against both B.

xylophilur and M. incognita. The fact that CF filtrates of Xenorhabdus spp. were more

active against nematodes under basic but not acidic conditions suggest that the major

active metabolite(s) is stable under basic condition or is an alkaline substance itself. As

well, the synergistic effect between pH and TSB at higher pH conditions and the loss of

the activity against M. incogrrita, but not against B. xyfophilus, by both fractions after

phase separation indicate that multiple nematicidai metabdites andor factors exist in the

CF filtrates, and that such metabolites a d o r factors may differ between bacterial species.

Page 76: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CRAPTER 4

ISOLATION, IDENTIFICATION AND IN VlTRO PRODUCTION

OF NEMATICIDAL METABOLITES FROM BACTEIUL CULTURES

4.1 Introduction

In Chapter 3 the nematicidal activity of the culture filtrates of different strains and

species of Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus was demonstrated. The results showed that

the nematicidal activity was detectable in the ethyl acetate extracts of the bacterial

cultures rather than in the aqueous fraction of the bacterial cultures after the ethyl acetate

extraction. To hirther investigate the chemical nature of these nematicidal metabolites,

the chemical structure of each of the nematicidal metabolites produced in selected culture

broths of Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus isolates was identified and the culture

conditions required for their in vitro production were determined.

4.2 Materials and methods

4.2.1 Bacteria and their broth cultures

The symbiotic bacteria, X. bovienii A2 1 , X. nematophilus BCI and ATCC 39497

and P. luminescens C9 and MD, were used.

To prepare bacterial cultures for isolation of nematicidal metabolites, a loopful of

the respective 48 h-old bacteria cuiture from a TSAD plate was added to a 200 ml

Erlenmeyer fiask containing 100 ml TSB. nie flask was shaicen on a gyratory shaker (150

rpm) for 24 h at 2S°C in the dark. The seed culture in the flask was then added totally to a

Page 77: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

2 L Erlenmeyer fiask containing 800 ml TSB and shaken. as above, for 2 or 4 d. An

amount, generally more than 20 L, of the culture bmth of each of the above bacterial

strains was prepared. Harvested culture broth was processed immediately as described

below.

4.2.2 General procedures for isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites

The general procedure for isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites

from bacterial cultures is shown in Fig 4. The harvested culture broth was centrifbged

(13, 000 g, 4OC. 10 min) to obtain the cell-free supernatant. The supernatant was then

extracted three times with an equal volume of ethyl acetate in 2 L separating funnels. The

ethyl acetate extracts were combined, and the remaining aqueous fraction in the extracts

was removed by adding an appropriate amount of anhydmus sodium sulfate. The

resulting solution was filtered through glasswool in û glass funnel to remove the particles

of sodium sulfate from the solution. The filtrate was then dried under vacuum in a rotary

evaporator under 30°C to obtain the dry organic extract of the cell-free bacterial culture,

which was then subject to separation by gel column chromatography. Diffemnt

metabolites were eluted from the gel column and collected in 18 x 150 mm test tubes.

The collected solutions that contained mainly the sarne component wen combined and

dried as described above to obtain a single fraction. The resulting fractions were

subjected to further separation by gel column chromatography to obtain purified

metabolic compounds. Thin layer chmmatographic plates (TLC) (Kieselgel 60, F2!54,

Merck, Darmstadt, Germany) w e n used regularly to help in the separation process. Süica

Page 78: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 4. Fiowsbart showing the general isolation pcocess of the organic extracts from

broth cultures of Xenorhcrbdus spp. or Pliotorhabdus spp.

Page 79: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

1 CELCFREE SUPERNATANT 1

1 ORGANIC EXTRACT 1

ethyl acetate extraction

1 ACTIVE FRACTIONS 1 1 INA- FRACTIONS 1

gel column chromatography

gel column

1 DETERMINATION OF CHEMICAL STIIUCïüRE(S) 1

chromatogiaphy

NMR, IR, MS, etc.

Page 80: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

gel 60 @MO, EM Science, Darmstadt, Germany) was used in gel column isolation unless

otherwise stated, and al1 the solvents used were analytical standard. The isolation and

purification process described in section 4.2.3 was done jointîy with Dr. J. Li and the

chemical characterization of the purified compounds was done solely by Dr. J. Li.

Chernical structures were determined by NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance). IR (infra-

red spectrometry) and MS ( m a s spectra) analysis. Nematicidal bioassays using pine

wood nematode. B. xyhphilus BC. were conducted, as described in section 2.4, at each

isolation step to detect the nematicidally active fractions or compounds. Agar diffusion

tests, using B. subtilis as the test organism, were conducted. as described in section 2.4. in

order to detect possible antibiotic activity.

Due to the chemical complexity of the organic extracts, the detûiled isolation

procedure for the nematicidal metabolites produced by ench of the bacteria will be

described separately.

4.2.3 isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites from cultures of

Photorhabdus luminescens and Xenorhobdus spp.

4.2.3.1 Isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites produced by P.

luminescens C9

A total of 3.2 g of crude organic extract of P. luminescens C9 culture was

obtained, as described in section 4.2.1. The extract was loaded ont0 a silica gel column

(27.5 x 4.8 cm) and eluted with a mixture of ether and hexanes (6.0 : 4.0). One of the four

major fractions eluted showed nematicidal activity against B. xylophilus. The active

fraction (0.24 g) was hrther purified by gel column chtomatography (24.0 x 2.7 cm),

Page 81: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

using a mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes (1: 9) to obtain a white solid compound, ST

(0.18 g), which was both nematicidal and antibacterial, and its chemical structure was

further characterized. The remaining inactive fractions were not studied.

4.2.3.2 Isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites produced by P.

luminescens MD

A totd of 7 g of crude organic extract of P. luminescens MD culture was obtained,

as described in section 4.2.1. The extract was separated by silica gel chrornatognphy

(column 41 x 4.8 cm) using a mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes (1: 9) as the eluting

solvent (4 L). Five major fractions, A (0.73 g green-yellowish solid), B (0.4 g greenish

solid), C, D and E, were collected. Then, 100% methanol (1 L) was added to wash out

fraction F. Fractions A and B were determined by bioassay to be nematicidal against B.

xylophilus. The remaining fractions were inactive except for fraction C, which was shown

to be antibacterial and was studied later in a separate project.

Fraction A was further purified by gel chromatography (column 37 x 2.7 cm)

using a mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes (0.8 : 9.2) as the eluting solution (2 L). One

major sub-fraction and a minor fraction were collected. The former gave a colorless

crystal, HD (0.7 g) and was confirmed as a nematicidal substance. The inactive minot

fraction was not analyzed further.

Fraction B was pucified by gel chromatography (column 28 x 2.7 cm), using a

mixture of ethyl acetate and hexanes (2.0 : 8.0) as the eluting solution (2 L). One major

and two minor sub-fractions were colîected and dcied under vacuum. The major sub-

fraction was a white miid compound, ST-1, and was confiied as a nematicidai and

Page 82: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

antibacterial compound. The two minor sub-fractions were inactive and were not

analyzed further.

4.2.3.3 Isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites produced by X.

nematophilus ATCC 39497

A total of 8.8 g of crude organic extract of X. nematophilus ATCC 39497 culture

was loaded ont0 the gel column (45 x 4.8 cm) and eluted initially with 40% ethyl acetate

in hexanes (2 L), then with 60% and 80% ethyl acetate in hexanes (2 L for each mixture),

respectively, and finally with 100% ethyl acetate (1 L). The column was then washed with

100% methanol(1 L). A total of 12 fractions were collected and their nematicidal activity

was tested, as described in section 2.4.

4.2.3.4 Isolation and identification of nematicidal metabolites produced by X.

nematophilus BC 1

A total of 2.0 g of crude organic extract of X. nematophilus BCl culture was

loaded onto the gel column (29 x 4.8 cm) and eluted initially with a mixture of ethyl

acetate and hexanes (2 : 8). The solvent was then changed to 100% ethyl acetate and

finally to 100% methanol. using 1 L of each solvent. Three fractions, A, B and C. were

collected. Fractions A and B were inactive and not studied further. The weakly active

fraction C was furcher separated in the gel colurnn (30 x 2.7 cm; C-18 reverse gel)

(BondapakB, Millipon Corp.. Milford USA;) and eluted initially with a mixture of

rnethanol and water (1 : 9, 400 ml). The eluate was changeci to 40% methanol in water

(400 ml), 70% methanol in water (400 ml) and f d l y to 100% methanol(400 ml) to get

Page 83: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

the four major sub-fractions. The nematicidai activity of each of these sub-fractions was

then tested against B. xylophilus, as described in section 2.4.

4.2.3.5 Isolation and identification of volatile nematicidal metabolites produced by X.

bovienii A2 1 and P. luminescens C9

Prelirninary experiments indicated that a volatile metabolite from the bacterial

cultures was toxic to 12s of M. incognita. Consequently, the following experiments were

done to identify the volatile, nematicidai metabolites (VM) from the bacterial cultures.

In the collecting bottle of the evaporator was added 1 ml 6N HCl solution, and the

bottle was imrnersed in ice particles. A total of 200 ml of 4 d-old CF culture filtrate of X.

bovienii A2 1, which was cultured as described in section 3.2.2, was then dned on the

rotary evaporator at 35OC. The solution recovered in the collecting bottle was re-

evaporated to obtain a white solid (O. lg; the chloride salt of the VM).

The sarne volume of CF filmte from P. luminescens C9 culture, which was

cultured as described in section 3.2.2, was treated similarly as described above and a

similar while solid (O. 12g; the chloride salt of VM-1) was obtained.

The chloride salts were analyzed to determine their chernical structures. The

structures of volatile, nematicidal VM and VM-1 were detedned reversally based on the

chernical natures of their cornsponding white solid salts.

4.2.4 In vitro production of the nematicidal substances identified h m the bacterial

cultures

4.2.4.1 Establishment of standard curves for nematicidal metabolites VM, ST and HD

Page 84: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Standard curves of the three nematicidal metabolites, VM, ST and HD, produced

by Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp., were established using a Milton 3000

spectrophotometer. The standard curve of VM was detennined by a color reaction of VM

with Nessler's reagent (Gerhardt, 1981). A solution of VM in the cuvette reacted with a

known quantity of the agent to forrn a color cornplex. By measuring the W aborbance

(450 nm) of these complexes prepared from a series of standard solutions of VM and

comparing them with the concentrations of the VM test solutions, a standard curve was

established. For ST and HD, the standard curves were established by measuring directly

the UV absorbance of their respective standard solutions in cuvettes in relation with the

concentration of ST or HD. The detailed procedures are described below.

Standard curve of VM and its salt(s) was established by the Nessler Reaction

(Gerhardt, 1981). Stock solution of 100 pg (NH.,+)/ml was prepared by dissolving

anhydrous ammonium chloride in ammonium-free deionized distilled water and diluting

to give a series of standard solutions with concentrations of NH.,' ranging from 0.5, 1, 2,

4, 6 to 12 pg/mî. To 1 .O ml of each of the standard solutions in a 1.5 ml disposable UV

grade cuvette (VWRB, VWR Scientifc of Canada, Edmonton, Canada) was added 40 pl

of Nessler's nagent (Aldrich@, Aldrich Chernical Co., hc., Milwaukee, WI, USA) and

the solution was mixed thoroughly. The absorbance of each solution was measured at 450

nm with the spectrophotometer at 0.5 h. Based on the aborbance and the concentration of

W,,+ in the solution in the cuvette, the standard cuve could be determined. The

established standard curve of VM was Cw = 0.021 19 + 13.3387A (~*=0.992), where

CW was the concentration of VM and iu salt (NH,' pg/ml) in a test sample in the

cuvette and A (O - 1.0) was the absorbance of a sample in the cuvette at 450 nm.

Page 85: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

The standard curve of ST was established sirnilarly to those described for VM. in

brief, standard solutions of ST in methanol, with concentrations ranging from 0.122,

0.244, 0.488, 0.977, 1.95, 3.91, 7.8 1 to 15.625 pg/ml, were prepared. Into a 1.5 ml

cuvette was added 0.8 ml of one of the standard solutions and the absorbance of the

solution at 315 nm, the wavelength of peak absorbance of ST, was measured. The

established equation of the standard curve of ST was Cm = -0.021 + 8.878A (R~=I),

when Cm was the concentration of ST (pglml) in a test sample in the cuvette and A (0.02

- 1.8) was the absorbance of a sample in the cuvette at 3 15 nm.

The standard curve of HD was established similarly to that of ST, except that the

standard solutions had concentrations from 1 S6. 3.125, 6.25, 12.5 to 25 pg/ml, and the

absorbance of the standard solutions in the cuvettes was measured in the

spectrophotometer at 271 nm, which is one of the wavelengths of maximum absorbance

for HD. The established equation of the standard curve of HD was CHD = -0.3636 +

20.9ûSA (R-1), where Cm was the concentration of HD (pg/ml) in a test sample in the

cuvette and A (0.09 -1.2) was the absorbance of a sample in the cuvette at 27 1 nm.

4.2.4.2 In vitro proâuction of VM

For quantitative detection of VM in the culture broth, 1 ml CF filtrate of the

bacterial culture was diluted LOO tirnes with deionized water. The pH of the diluted

filtrate was adjusted to 10.5 using 6N NaOH (Gerhardt, 1981). Into 1 ml pH-adjusted

filtrate in the cuvette was added 40 pl Nessler's nagent and the solution was mixed

thoroughly. The absorbance was measured at 450 nm at 0.5 h, as described above. TSB

was diluted and tested similarly to serve as the reference.

Page 86: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

A. Production of VM and its salt(s) by different bacterial cultures

Four-day-old CF culture filtrates of the strains of A21 of X. bovienii, All, BCl,

D 1, 19. 27 and ATCC 39497 of X. nemutophilzu and C9 and MD of P. luminescens

grown in T S B were prepared. as described in section 3.2.2. The concentration of VM and

its salt(s) in the CF filtrates was deterrnined as descxibed above.

B. Production of VM by different bacterial culhues over time

X. bovienii A2 1, X. nematophilus BC 1 and P. luminescens MD were CU ltured for

up to 5 d as described in section 3.2.2. Three flasks of culture of each bacterial species

were taken randomly each day for 5 d and CF filtrates were prepared sepantely, as

described in section 3.2.2. The CF filtrates were then diluted and the concentration of VM

and its salt(s) was tested as described above.

C. Production of VM as influenced by aeration of the bacterial culture

To investigate the relationship between aeration and production of VM in the

culture broth, a 24 h-old seed culture of X. bovienii A2 1 grown in TSB was prepared, as

described in section 3.2.2. Into each of the tiuee flasks (125 ml) containing 12.25, 24.5,

49,73.5 or 98 ml TSB was added 0.25.0.5, 1 .O, 1.5 or 2.0 ml seed culture to make a final

volume of 12.5,25,50, 75 or 100 ml in each of the three flasks. The greater the volume

of TSB in the flask, the greater the volume of the seed culture was added so that the

volume ratios of seed c u l t u d S B wen the same in ail tnatments. The resulting cultures

filled 1/10, 115, US, 315 or 415 of the total capacity of the flasks, respectively. The flasks

Page 87: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

were then sealed (air-proof) carefully with aluminum foil, and taped and cultured for 4 d,

as described in section 3.2.2. The aeration of the bacterid culture in each flask correlates

inversely with the volume of the culture under the experimental conditions. Bacterid

growth. pH value and concentration of VM and its sait(s) in the broth culture were

measured, as described in section 3.2.5.2.

D. Production of VM as influenced by culture medium

A 24 h-old seed culture of X. nematophilus BCl grown in TSB was prepared as

described above. One milliliter of the seed culture was then added to each of three flasks

containing one of the t h e media, TSB, LB and NB (50 ml medium/l25 ml flask), and

cultured for 4 d, as described in section 3.2.2. The pH of the 4 d-old culture broths were

measured directly using the pH meter. The CF filtrates of the cultures were prepared, and

the concentration of VM and its salt(s) was determined as described above.

4.2.4.3 In vitro production of ST and HD

A. Qualitative detection of Kû in the culture bmihs

To further clarib the variable production of HD by the same strain or species of

Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus, X. bovienii A21, X. nematophilus BCI and ATCC39497

and P. luminescens C9 and MD were each cultured in TSB, LB and/or NB for 1,2 or 4 d

as described in section 3.2.2. The HD production in the culture broths was detected using

EMich's wthod (Holding and Colke, 1971). The experiments were repeated several

times.

Page 88: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

B. Quantitative production of ST and HD by bacterial cultures over time

The procedure for extraction of ST and HD from the bacterial culture broth, which

was proven to have an extraction efficacy of about 95% in prelirninary experiments, is

descrikd below. Photorhabdus luminescens C9 and MD were cultured for up to 8 d as

described in section 3.2.2. Three flasks for each bacterial strain were taken randomly

from the shaker each day for 5 d and also on day 8. The harvested broth in each flask was

adjusted to pH 7.0 with 6N HCl. and 20 ml of it was taken and centrifuged (13.000 g, 10

min, 4OC). The CF supernatant from each of the flasks was poured into a separating

funnel, extracted with 20 ml ethyl acetate four times for 0.5 h each time, and the extracts

were combined. The sediment from the above broth, after centrifugation, was re-

suspended in 10 ml water, and also extracted four times with 20 ml ethyl acetate, as

described above. The nsulting extracts of the supernatant and sediment from the sarne

flask culture were combined and dned under vacuum on a rotary evaporator. The dried

rnaterial was re-dissolved in 1 ml methanol and subjected to TLC separation.

Since the above methanol solution contained many other metabolites in addition

to ST and HD, samples of the solutions were first developed in TU3 plates (9 x 2.5 cm)

to separate ST or HD from al1 other metabolites in the samples. This procedure is

described below .

A 10 pl sample of the solution was applied as a band 1 .O cm from the bottom of

the plate using a disposable 10 pl micropipette (Drurnmond Scientific, Broornall, PA,

USA). The plates were placed in a 250 ml beaker containing 20 ml of the developing

solvent that was a mixture of methmol - chloroform (0.2 : 9.8 or 0.15 : 9.85 for extracts

fiom P. luminescens MD and Cg, respectively). The beaker was sealed wiih aluminum

Page 89: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

foi1 for TU3 development and the solvent was allowed to migrate to 1 .O cm from the top

of the TU3 plates. After development the bands of the metabolites on the plate was

visualized with a UV lamp (254 nm). The ST or HD band, which was cornpletely

separated from other bands. was cut off selectively, and then immersed irnmediately in 1

ml methanol in a 1.5 ml centrifuge tube. The resulting solution in each tube was put aside

in the dark for 1 h, stirred for 3 min on a mixer and centrifuged for 3 min (13,000 g) to

give a clear supernatant in each tube. The supematant was then transferred to a 1.5 ml UV

grade cuvette, and used directly for W absorbance measurement (3 15 nm for ST and 271

for HD) as described in section 4.2.4.1. Sometimes. the above supematant was diluted

with methanol first so as to fit the linear part of the standard curves. Based on W

absorbance and dilution of the test samples, the concentrations of ST or indole in the

original bacterial cultures can be determined.

4.3 Results

4.3.1 Nematicidal metabolites identified from cultures of Photorhabdus luminescens and

Xenorhabdus spp.

Three metabolites with nematicidal properties, nnmely arnrnonia, 3.5-dihydroxy4

isopmpylstilbene and indole, were identified €rom culture broths and organic extracts of

Xenorhabdus spp. and P. luminescens, and the results are summarized in Table 10.

After a series of NMR, IR and MS analyses of the nematicidal compounds

obtained, ST and ST-1, which were detected in bacterial cultures of P. luminescens C9

and P. luminescens MD, respectively, were identifKd to bc the sarne nematicidal

Page 90: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 10. Summ~ry of nematicidai metaboütes identified from cultures of different

isolates of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus luminescens

X. bovien ii

A2 1

X. nematophilus

BC1

ATCC39497

P. luminescens

c9

MD

- ---

+: positive; -: negative.

nt: not determined.

Page 91: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

compound, 3.5-dihydroxy4isopropylstilbene, and the HD, which was isolated in

cultures of P. luminescens MD. was confirmed to be indole (NMR, IR and MS data not

shown. because they are not novel compounds). The structures and UV spectra of these

compounds are shown in Fig. 5 and Fig 6, respectively.

The white solid cornpounds, which were obtained after acidification of the

condensed volatile metabolites of the cultures of X. bovienii A2 1 and P. luminescens Cg,

were identified to be the same compound, ammonium chloride. Consequently, the volatile

metabolites, VM and VM-1, from the cultures of X. bovienii A2 1 and P. luminescens C9 ,

respective1 y, were mmonia

Isolation of the nematicidal metabolites from the crude organic extracts of X.

nematophilus BCI and ATCC 39497 was unsuccessful, although the crude extracts of

both strains showed nematicidal activity against 14s and adults of B. xylophilus (Table 8) .

Fraction C of X. nematophilus BC1 showed weaker nematicidal activity than did the

crude extract and no activity was detected in sub-fractions of C. Twelve fractions had

been collected after separation of the crude organic extract of ATCC 39497, but none of

them showed nematicidal activity against B. xylophilur.

4.3.2 In vitro production of the nematicidal metabolites produced by Xenorhabdus spp.

and Photorhabdus spp.

4.3 -2.1 In vitro production of ammonia and its salt(s)

A. Production of ammonia and its salt(s) by different bacterial cultures

Arnmonia and its sdt(s) were pmduced by ai l the bactetial strains and species of

Page 92: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 5. Structures of (a) 3,s-dihydmxy-4-isopropylstilbene (ST) (R=CHd md (b)

indole.

Page 93: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 94: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 6. UV spectra of (a) 3$dhydroxy-4-isopropyIstilbene (ST) and (b) indole.

Page 95: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 96: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus cultured in TSB, and the concentration varied with the

bacterial isolates and species (Table 1 1). X. bovienii A2 1 , X. nematophilas BC 1. D 1 and

ATCC 39497 produced significantly greater arnount of ammonia and its salt(s) in cultures

than X. nenuitophilus 19 (P < 0.05).

B. Production of ammonia and its sait (s) by different bacterial cultures over tirne

The concentration of ammonia and its salt in culture broths of X. nematophilui

BC1 and P. luminescens MD increased gradually over a 4d and 3d period, respectively,

before decreasing thereafter whereas it continued to increase in X. bovienii A21 culture

broth over a 5d petiod (Fig. 7).

C. Production of ammonia and its salt(s) as influenced by aeration of the bacterial

cultures

The concentration of ammonia and its salt(s), the bacterial growth and the pH of

the culture broth were influenced greatly by the degree of aeration of the bacterial culture

(Fig. 8). The smail volume of culture broth in the flasks allowed for better aeration of the

culture, better bacterial growth, a higher pH and a higher concentration of ammonia and

iis salt(s).

D. Production of arnrnonia as influenced by culture media of the bacterial culture

Culture media composition influenced the production of ammonia and its sait(s)

(Table 12). Of the three media used bacterial cultures grown in TSB and LB had

sipificantly greater amount of arnmonia and it salt(s) than did ihose grown in NB (P <

Page 97: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 11. Concentration of ammonia and its saIt(s) (N&+pg/mi) in 4 d-old culture

bmths of Xenorhabdus spp. and Pkotorhabdus luminescens grown in TSB

Bacteria Concentration Bacteria Concentration

(W+ pg/ml) (Mt+ c l g w

X. bovien ii X. nematophilus

A2 1 749.4 f 36. la 19 467.2 f 5.8bc

27 694.4 f 1 7 . 2 ~

AI1 593.0 I 6.7ab

P. luminescens BC 1 749.4 f 3 I .Sa

C9 70 1.2 i: 24.6ab DI 729.5 k 13.3a

MD 704.2 f 40.5ab ATCC 39497 766.9 f 4 1 S a

Data are expressed as mean f. SE ( n a except strains of 19,27, Al1 and Dl where n=3).

Means followed by the same letter are not significantly different (P < 0.05).

Page 98: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 7. Concentration of amnonia and its sdt(s) (N&* Wtd) in culture broths of

Xenorhabdus bovienii A21 (A21), X. nemutophilus BCl @Cl) and Photorhabdus

luminesceiis C9 (C9) grown in tryptic soy broth over 5 days.

Page 99: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Age of the bacterial cultures (days)

Page 100: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 8. (a) Bacterial gronth, @) pH and (c) concentration of -nia and its salt(s)

of Xenorhabdus buvienii A21 in tryptic soy broth as idïueaced by aeration of the

culture. Degree of aetation was baseà on the inverse relationship between the

volume of the bacterid cuI(Iates .ML the size of the llasks under the experimentiil

conditions. Y10, US, US, 3/S and 4/5 represent volume ratios of culture medium in

the flasks compareci with the totai capacity of the ~asks.

Page 101: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Volume ratios of the bacterial culture and flask

Page 102: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 12. pH and concentration of ammonia and its salt(s) of tryptic soy bmth

(TSB), Luria broth (LB) and nutrient broth (NB) in which Xenorhabdus

nemutophilus BC1 had ken grown for 4 d

Growth media Concentration

(NItf pgvml)

TSB

LB

NB

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=6). Means in the sarne column followed by the sarne

letter are not significantly diffennt (P c 0.05).

Page 103: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

0.05). Also, the pH of the bacterial cultures gown in LI3 was higher than that in TSB and

NB (P < 0.05). The nsults indicate that some alkaline metabolites other than arnmonia

and its salt significantly contributed to the high pH values of the bacterial culture grown

in NB.

4.3.2.2 In vitro production of ST and indole

A. Qualitative detection of indole in the culture broths

Indole production in the culture broths of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus

spp. varied, even between the sarne strain or species of bacteria at replicate experiments

(Table 13). P. luminescens MD produced indole at a relative higher frequency in different

media tested. and X. bovienii A2 1 and X. nematophilus BC 1 produced no indole. As well,

it appears that the media composition affects indole production (Table 13) in that bacteria

grown in TSB and LB generally showed a higher frequency of indole production than did

those grown in NB.

B. Production of ST and indole in culture broths of P. luminescens C9 and MD over time

ST and indole weE detectable in the bacterial cultures of both C9 and MD

isolûtes of P. luminescens over a 8 d p e n d (Fig. 9). In general, ST increased gradually

duhg the first 2 or 3 d incubation and then maintained a relatively stable level before

decnasing gradually thereafter. Indole, however. increased rapidly and reached its peak at

2 d before decreasing themaiter.

Page 104: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 13. Occumnce of indole in broth cultums of Xendabdus spp. and

Photorhabdus luminescens grown in tryptic soy broth (TSB), nutrient broth (NB) or

Luria broth (LB) for 1,2 or 4 d

Bacteria Indole production in different media

(species and isolates)

TSB LB NB

Id 2d 4d 4d 4d

X. bovienii

A21 013 * X. nematophilus

BC 1 0/3

ATCC 39497 L /2

P. luminescens

C9 1 14

MD US

*: Number of positive tests1 total tests.

Page 105: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 9. Production over t h e of 3,5=àihydroxy4-isopropyIstNbene (ST) and indole

(HD) in culture broths of Photorhabdus luminescens C9 (C9) and P. luminescens

MD (MD) grown in tryptic soy broth. ST-MD and HD-MD represent production of

ST and EID by strain MD; ST-C9 and HD-C9 represent production of ST and HD

by strain Cg.

Page 106: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

4 S T - k t D HD-MD

Page 107: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

4.4 Discussion

Three nematicidal metaboli tes, amrnonia, ST and indole, have been iden ti fed

from bacterial cultures of Xenoriuzbdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. The results confirm

and expand upon the observations described in Chapter 3 that multiple factors contributed

to the total nematicidal activity detected in the culture filtrates of the bacteria.

Ammonia and its salt(s), which are known for their toxicity and npelling activity

against plant-parasitic nematodes including J2s of M. incognita (Bishop. 1958; Vassallo,

1967; Rodriguez-Kabana., 1986; Castro et al.. 1991), was comrnonly pmduced in the

broth culture by d l the bacterial isolates tested. ST, however, was produced only by P.

iuminescens, whereas indole was produced by some species of both Xenorhabduî and

Photorhabdus.

Indole is a natural product of plants (Bannister, 198 1; Anderson, 1987; Kubo et

al., 1993) and microorganisms including Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp.

(Freeman, 1985; Fmer , 1995). It has a variety of effects on insects (Herbert et al., 1996;

Thûnabaiu et al., 1996), microorganisms (Kubo et al., 1993) and tumor cells (Kubo &

Morimitsu, 1995). ST has been identified earlier as an antimicrobial compound from

cultures of Photorhabduc spp. (Paul et al., 198 1; Li et al., 199%). In the present study,

both ST and indole were demonstrated for the first time to be nematicidai.

The isolation and identification of nematicidai metabolites h m cmde organic

extracts of X. nematophilus BCl and ATCC 39497 was unsuccessful, although the

extracts showed nematicidai activity against B. xylophilus (Table 8). Contrary to

expectation, the activity of Fraction C of the extract of X. nematophilus BCl d e r gel

column separation was weaker than the cmde extract, and activity was lost when fraction

Page 108: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

C was further separated by gel column chromatography into subfractions. Similariy, the

crude organic extracts of X. nenultophilus ATCC 39497 showed nematicidal activity, but

no active metabolites were identified after gel column separation. The reason for this loss

of activity &ter gel column separation is not clear, but there are several possibilities.

Firstly, the active metabolites may be unstable and be denatured during the separation

process. Secondly, the quantity of the active metabolites may be too small, compared with

other nonactive metabolites, to be detected and collected using the methods descnbed.

Thirdly, it is possible that these active metabolites were bound strongly to the gel in the

column and were not eluted out dunng gel column chrornatography. Another possibility

is that a synergistic effect may occur among some metabolites, and the initially observed

nematicidal activity disappeared when the metabolites were separated into diffennt

factions. However, this latter option appears to be invalid, at least for ATCC 39497,

because no nematicidal activity was detected when dl the collected fractions were re-

combined into one sample, one by one, and tested each tirne for nematicidal activity until

al1 the fractions were combined

Fraction C of P. luminescens MD was not nematicidal, but it showed antibacterial

activity against B. subtilis in agar diffusion tests. Since only antibiotic stilbene derivatives

(Paul et ai., 1981; Li et al., 1995b). anhaquinone derivatives (Li et al., 1995b; Sztaricski

et al., 1992) and genistein (Sztacicski et ai., 1992) have been reported from cultures of P.

luminescens, the antibiotic in fraction C might cepresent a new antibiotic fkom P.

iuminescens. This finding led, subsequentiy, to the identification of another novel

antibiotic. a furan derivative, produced by P. lwninescens MD (Hu et al., unpubl.).

Page 109: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

The loss of activity of the crude organic extracts of Xenorhabdus spp., following

separation procedures sirnilar to those of P. luminescens, indicated that the nematicidal

metabolites produced by Xenorhbdus spp. are quite different from those produced by

Photorhabdus spp.

The identification of ammonia from culture broths of Xenorhabdus spp. and

Photorhabdus spp. may partially explain the loss of activity of the bacterial cultures

against J2s of M. incognita when the cultures were acidified or separated into organic and

aqueous fractions (Tables 7 and 8). Ammonia should be in the aqueous fraction after

ethyl acetate extraction, and when the aqueous fraction was freeze-dried, ammonia should

evaporate cornpletely. This coincides with the fact that the pH values of the freeze-dried

aqueous fractions decreased significantly to nearly the same value as the TSB. However,

this does not necessarily mean that the higher pH values of the cultun filtrates could be

completely attributed to the occurrence of ammonia. Other metabolites also may be

involved. The cultures of X. nematophilus BCl grown in TSB. LB and NB had sirnilm

pH values, but concentrations of ammonia and its salt(s) in the cultures were significantly

different (Table 12). The results indicated that some alkaline metabolites, other than

ammonia and its salt(s), were present in the culture and contributed to the total pH of the

cultures, in particular in NB.

indole was not produced by al1 svains and species of Xenorhabdus and

Photorhabdus in this study (Table 13). Even for the sarne bacterial isolate, the occurrence

of indole was higbly variable under experimental conditions (Table 13). It was observed

that when the same bacterial strain was cultured in TSB h m the same batch of the

medium under virtually identical culture conditions but at different dates, indole may or

Page 110: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

may not be produced. Moreover, it was repeatedly observed. but at variable frequency,

that indole occurrence was variable between replicate Basks that received the same seed

cultures. Supposedly indole is produced by microorganisms via tryptophan (Paul et al.,

198 1 ; Freeman, 1985). The media composition, especially the quantity of tryptophan,

probably directly influences indole production. However, the nason for the variable

indole production when al1 known factors were constant remains unclear.

The highly variable occurrence of indole rnay explain why indole was not isolated

from the organic extracts of the culture broths of ATCC 39497 and P. luminescens Cg,

although both strains produced indole in some instances (Table 13; Fig. 9). The only

exceptions in indole production were X. nematophih BC 1 and X. bovienii A2 1 , which

always gave a negative reaction during tests.

Al1 but one strain (Sztaricskai et al.. 1992) of P. luminescens have k e n reported

to produce ST in culture broths (Hu et al., 1998). It was proposed (Li et al., 1995b) that

prolonged incubation of that strain in the culture leads to the disappearance of ST. In the

present study it was shown that the concentration of ST that was produced in cultures by

both C9 and MD isolates declined graduaily after about 5 d incubation (Fig. 9). The

results support the hypothesis of ST production by Li et al. (1995b).

In conclusion, three nematicidal metaboiites, ammonia, ST and indole, were

identified from bacterial cultures of Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus. The results confinn

and expand earlier observations described in Chapter 3 that in vitro cultures of the

bacteria are nematicidal and partially explain some of the results observed in Chapter 3.

Amrnonia was commonly produced by al1 the bacterial strains and species tested, and ST

was produced by only P. luminescens. Conversely, indole was produceci by some species

Page 111: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

of both Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus. However, occurrence of indole in TSB, LB and

NB was highly variable even for the same bacterial strain. The production of the

nematicidal metabolites was relaied to the bacterial strains and species and culture

conditions. Although no secondary metabolites, which are nematicidal against B.

xyfophilus, were identified from the organic extracts of the bacterial cultures of

Xenorhabdus spp., the results indicate that the nematicidal metabolites produced by

Xenorhabdus spp. are quite different from those produced by Photorhabdus spp.

Page 112: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CHAPTER 5

NEMATICIDAL PROPERTIES OF

33-DIHYDROXu-4-ISOPROPYLSTILBENE (ST) AND INDOLE

5.1 Introduction

Three secondary metabolites with nematicidal properties, arnmonia, ST and

indole, have been identified from broth cultures of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus

spp. Ammonia and its salts are known to be toxic to many nematode species including

mot h o t nematodes, Meloidogyne spp. (Bishop, 1958; Castro et al., 1991). but ST and

indole have not been previously reported to be nematicidal. To better understand their

nematicidal properties, their potential application and to provide dues as to their possible

biological roles in the bacterium - nematode - insect interaction, a series of experiments,

using ST and indole, were done to investigate: 1) the nematicidal activity of ST and

indole against nematodes of different species including entomopathogenic nematodes; 2)

the effects of ST and indole on mobility, egg hatch and dispersal behaviour of nematodes

of different species; 3) the nematicidal activity of some indole derivatives and 4) to

determine the potential efficacy of indok against M. incognita in greenhouse tests.

5.2 Materiais and methods

5.2*1 Test nematodes

The following isolates and species of nematode were used. They are plant-

parasitic anaor fimgal-feeding nematode species, Aphelenchoides rhytium, B. xylophilus

BC and 41426, B. mucronarics France and M. incognita; a fne-living nematode,

Page 113: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Caenorhobditis elegans wild type; and entomopathogenic nematodes, Heterorhabditis

spp. HMD and Spain. H. bacteriophoru Oswego. if. murelatus, H. rnegidis 90,

Steinemema carpocapsae BJ, S. feltiae CH-S-MER, S. glaseri NC19. S. glaseri, S.

kushidai, S. puertoricense and S. riobrave (Table 4). The nematodes were cultured and

collected as described in section 2.3. and were used irnrnediately after collection from

their respective cultures.

5.2.2 Nematicidal activity of ST and indole against different nematode species

5.2.2.1 Effect of ST and indole on different nematodes in immersion tests

ST was dissolved in DMSO to form a stock solution. Different amounts of the

stock solution were diluted with distilled water plus 20 pl of nematode suspension (-100

nematodes of one of the nematode species) to give a final volume of 1 ml in each of the

small Petri dishes (35 x 10 mm) with concentrations of ST From 6.25 - 200 pg/ml

(DMSO 5 1%, vlv). However, in the test against C. elegans, ST was dissolved in ethanol

and diluted with M9 buffer to the desired concentrations (ethanol 5 2%, vlv). Similady,

indole stock solutions w e n prepared in PEG (S 2%, vlv). The dishes with the test

solutions and the nematodes were seded with Parafilm and incubated at 25°C in the dark.

Nematicidal activity was detennined as described in section 2.4. The experiment. using

each series of combinations of test substance and each nematode species were repeated at

least once with three replicates for each treatrnent.

The known nemeticidal compound, 2-stilben01 (Sigma) (Suga, 1994), which is a

stilbene derivative, was tested similady to serve as a reference.

Page 114: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

5.2.2.2 Effect of indole on migration of J2s of M. incognita in a sand column

To test the mobility of the J2s of M. incognita in sand following exposure to low

concentrations of indole, indole solutions were prepared by dissolving it in PEG and

diluting it with distilled water to 50, 100,200 and 400 j,@ml (PEG S 1%, vlv).

River sand, supplied by the Greenhouse Facility of the Depariment of the

Biologicai Sciences, was screened to particle size 150 - 300 pm, washed thoroughly with

tap water, then air-dried. This sand was used to prepare a sand column, designed as

illustrated in Fig. 10. The glass column was closed at one end by taping a layer of WS

paper tissue over the end of the column. One milliliter of sand, prepared as described

above, was poured into the column, and the papered end was then immened in 2.5 ml of

indole test solution in a test tube. About 200 J2s of M. incognita in 30 pl distilled water

were added 10 min later ont0 the surface of the sand column. The test tube was then

sealed with Parafilm to rninimize evaporation, held vertically in a rack and incubated at

25OC in the dark.

After a 24 h incubation period the number of I2s remaining in the sand column

and those that had migrated down into the solution at fhe bottom of the test tube was

counted. To collect the J2s remaining in the sand column, the glass column was taken out

of the test tube, and the paper tissue and the sand inside the column were washed with

distilled water into a Petri dish (60 x 10 mm). The nematode suspension was decanted

from the dish into a glass via1 and the sand was washed ihus three times with 5 ml

distilied water for each wash. The nematode suspension in the glas via1 was allowed to

settle and the upper supernatant discardeci. The concentrated suspension of J2s was

examineci under the sien0 microscope (25 X) and the number of J2s counted. The J2s in

Page 115: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 10. Sand column useci in the migration tests of the second stage juvenües of

Meloidogyne incognito (length unit: cm).

Page 116: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

rack

tape ,

, - test tube

L indole - solution

Page 117: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

the test solution at the bottom of the test tube were counted by transfemng the nematode

suspension to a dish and counting them using a stereo microscope.

The percentage of J2s of M. incognita that had migrated into the indole solution at

the bottom of the test tube was calculated as follow: Migration (9%) = (No. of 12s that had

migrated to the test solution at the bottom of the test tube)/(Totd No. of J2s that had

migrated into the solvent control solution at the bottom of the test tube and those that

remained in the sand) x 100.

There were five nplicates for each treatment and the expriment was repeated

once. Both water and the solvent (1% PEG, v/v) were included in the experiments to

serve as controls.

5.2.2.3 Effect of ST and indole on egg hatch of the nematodes

A. Egg hatch of Meloidogyne incognita

Egg sacs of M. incognita were hand-picked from infected mots of tomato

seedlings grown in a greenhouse, as described in section 2.3. Three golden egg sacs of

equal size were immersed in a Petri dish containing 1 ml of ST solution at concentrations

from 6.25 to 200 pghl (DMSO S 1 %, vlv). The dishes wen sealed with Parafilm and

incubated at 25OC in the dark. After 5 d the hatched juveniles were counted and the egg

sacs in each dish washed with 5 ml distilled water thne times, before transfemng them to

a new dish containing 1 ml distilled water. The dishes were sealed and kept as above for

another 5 d, and then the hatched juveniles were again counted.

Experiments using indole were conducted similarly except that the solutions with

concentrations ranging from 25 to 200 pg/mI were prepared in PEG (S 146, v/v). The

Page 118: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

above experirnents were repeated three times with t h e nplicates for each treatment. The

respective solvent (1% DMSO or 1% PEG, v/v) and distilled water served as control.

B. Egg hatch of Bursaphelenchus xylophilus BC

ST was dissolved in ethanol and diluted with distilled water to five different

concentrations in the range of 6.25 - 1 0 pghi (ethanol S 146, vlv). Its effect on egg

hatch of pine wood nematode B. xylophilus was tested as described below.

Eggs of B. lylophilus were obtained as described by Shuto et al., (1989). Gravid

B. xylophilus were suspended in 0.5% ethanol solution (- 5,000 - 7,000 nematodes/ml),

then 1 ml of the nematode suspension was poured into each small Petri dish (35 x 10

mm). After 4 h incubation (2S°C) to induce egg-laying, the suspension of the nematodes

was removed by decanting or sucking with a pipette. Each Petri dish was then washed

gent1 y three times with 1 ml distilled water each time to ensun complete removal of the

remaining nematodes while allowing most of the eggs to remain in the dish. Immediately,

1 ml of ST solution was added to each dish and the eggs were counted under a stereo

microscope (25 x). Dishes containing about LOO - 150 eggs were seded with P&ilm and

incubated in the dark (25°C). Egg hatching rate was recorded 24 h a€ter incubation.

The experîment was repeated three times, and ethanol solution (l%, vlv) md

distilled water served as controls.

5.2.3 In vivo effect of indole on Meloidugyne incognita

5.2.3.1 Sand application tests

The possible nematicidal effect of indole on M. incognita under in vivo conditions

Page 119: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

was investigated. Indole solutions of different concentrations. 50, LOO, 200 pg/ml (PEG 5

1%. v/v), were prepared as described above. The concentrations of indole solution were

selected based on results from preüminary tests.

Tomato seedlings with one-pair of tme leaves that had been grown in autoclaved

sandy soil (3 parts sand and 1 part loam soil) were selected and their mots washed

thoroughly with tap water to wash away soil particles. Each of the seedlings was then

transplantcd into a plastic vial (diameter 2.9 cm and height 5.8 cm) containing 20 ml

sand, prepared as described above. Immediately, 7 mi indole test solution was added to

wet the sand. A k r 0.5 h about 300 J2s of M. incognita in 30 pi water was added onto the

surface of the sand in the vial. The vials were sealed at top with Cotton to minimize the

evaporation. The inoculated seedlings were kept in a growth chamôer (25'C) with a 14 h

light : 10 h dark daily regime and watered as required (3 ml each time). At 20 d post

inoculation the roots of the seedlings were stained as described below, examined under

the stereo microscope (25 x), and the number of galls, the total number of nematodes

inside the mots and the developmental stage of the nematode were recorded. The large

galls were dissected whenever necessary to obtain an accurate count of the nematodes

inside the galls.

To better observe the nematodes inside the rwts, the mts were stained using a

method modifieci from Byrd et al. (1983). Tomato mots were immersed in -5% sodium

hypochlorite for 20 min. washed in tap water, immersed in tap water for 30 min.

immersed in diluted (ln0 strcngth) acid-fuchsin-stwi solution. and heated to boiling for

Page 120: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

30 sec. M e r the solution had cooled to room temperature, the roots were washed in

water and the nematodes counted under the steno microscope (25 x).

A commercial nematicide, oxamyl (DunpontB, 10% granular formulation;

courtesy of Dr. E. Riga, Vineland Station, Agriculture and A@-food Canada, Ontario),

was included in the expriment to serve as a reference. Solutions of oxamyl were

prepared by immersing 100 mg oxamyl granules in 20 ml 50% PEG solution, stimng and

homogenizing on a magnetic stirrer for 2 h and diluting with distilled water to 10 pg/ml

(1% PEG, v/v). There were 10 replicates for each treatment and the experiment was

repeated once. Distilled water and solvent (1% PEG, vfv) were prepared and tested

similarly to serve as the controls.

5.2.3.2. Foliage application tests

ùidole solutions of different concentrations, 50, 100,200 and 400 pg/rnl (PEG 'I

l%), were prepared as described above. Oxarnyl solutions were prepared as described

above except that 100 mg oxamyl granules wen immersed and homogenized in 4 ml 50%

PEG and the final concentration was adjusted with distilled water to 50 pg/rnl (1% PEG,

vlv)

Tomato seedlings with one-pair of true leaves were transplanted into the vials of

sand of the same type as those described above, watered immediately with 7 ml distilled

water and kept in the growth chamber as previously descniid. At 24 h p s t

transplantation, sand in the vials was re-wetted with distilled water (1.5 ml). The vials

were sealed with cotton at top, then the cotton was covered with a piece of aluminum foil.

Together, the cotton and the foi1 prevented any leaking of the solution into the via1 during

Page 121: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

foliage spray. The seedlings were sprayed with the respective test solutions, prepared as

described above, using a hand sprayer until there was solution run-off from the leaves.

The aluminum foi1 tops and the cotton plugs were disassembled &ter about 2 h when

there were no liquid drops remaining on the leaves. The vials were then re-sealed with

new cotton and kept in the growth chamber, as described above. At 24 h post-spray about

300 12s of M. incognitu in 30 pi water were added to the surface of the sand in each vial.

The viais were again seaied with cotton and kept in the growth charnber as befon. The

seedlings were watered regularly to maintain sand moisture. At 20 d post inoculation the

roots of the seedlings were stained and examined using a stereo microscope. The number

of gdls, numbers of nematodes inside the root tissue and the number of each

developmental stage of the nematode were recorded.

There were eight replicates for each treatment. Both water and solvent control

(1% PEG, v/v) were included in the expriment. The experiment was repeated once but

with 10 replicates for each treatrnent, and the highest concentration of indole was

increased to 1,000 pg/ml and oxamyl to 100 pg/ml. As well, each treatment solution also

contained 0.05% (vfv) Tween 80 (Sigma@) to further promote leaf wetting (Marban-

Mendoza and Viglierchio, 1980).

5.2.4 Nematicidal activity of some indole derivatives

Several cornmercially available indole denvatives were purchased and their

activity against B. xylophilus BC was tested as descriid in section 2.4. The compounds

were dissolved in DMSO and diluted with distilled water to 12.5, 25, JO, 100,200,400,

Page 122: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

600, 800 and 1,000 pg/ml (DMSO 5 5%, vfv). EC,, and LCm of each compound were

determined as described by Finney (197 1).

5.2.5 Chemosensory effect of ST and indole on different nematode spcies

A bioassay was developed to explore whether ST and indole influence behaviour

of the nematode symbionts of the bactena and other nematodes. Suspensions of J4s and

adults of B. xylophilus BC, J2s of M. incognita and Us of H. bacteriophoru Oswego, H.

marelatus, H. rnegidis 90, Heterorhabditis sp. HMD and Spain, S. carpocapsae BJ, S.

feltiae CH-S-MER, S. gluseri, S. glaseri NC19, S. kushidai, S. puertoricense and S.

riobrave were prepared as described in section 2.3. They were washed four times with SD

water and concentrated to about 250,000 nematodes/mi SD water. In a sterile, laminar-

flow hooâ, 10,000 nematodes in 40 pl stenlized water were added to the center of each

Petri plate (100 x 15 mm, plastic) contnining 10 ml of 1.5% agar. The plates were left

open and rotated frequently to ensure the evenness of the influence of air-flow on the agw

medium in the Petri plates. Stock solutions of ST of different concentrations, ranging

from 10 - 10,000 pg/ml methanol, were prepared befonhand. Ten microliter of one of the

concentrations of ST solution was pipetted onto a filter paper disc (diameter 0.6 mm,

Watennan No. 4. Dose of ST on each paper âisc was 0.1, 1, 10, and 100 pg, respectively),

w hich was allowed to just dry in the hood before placing on the agar surface of the plates.

The control discs containing 10 pl methanol alone were prepared similarly. When the

nematode suspension in the center of the plate was nearly dry in the laminar-flow hood

and the nematodes were beginning to actively crawl over the plate surface. the control

disc and three of the discs containing ST wen plred on the surface of the agar medium,

Page 123: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

as shown in Fig. 1 I. The plates were sealed with Parafïlm and kept at room temperature

in the dark. The distribution patterns of the nematodes on the surface of the agar plates

were observed at 0.5, 1 and 2 h after sealing the plates. Tests using J2s of M. incognita

were conducted similarly, except that smaller plates (60 x 15 mm, plastic) were used, and

5,000 J2s 130 pi SD water wen inoculated ont0 the center of the plate.

Experiments using indole were conducted simiiarly and the concentrations of

indole tested were the same as those described above for ST.

The above procedures were conducted under standard, sterile conditions under

low light intensity (indole is light sensitive). Each test was repeated at least twice with

three replicates for each treatment. Careful preparation and handling of the plates was

necessary in order to avoid the effects of uneven drying and temperature gradient on

nematode distribution over the agar surface. A fine needle was sometimes used to help

spread the Us from the site of inoculation, where the Us often displayed clumping during

the drying process.

5.3 Results

5.3.1 Nematicidal activity of ST and indole

5.3.1.1 Effect of ST and indole on different nematode species in immersion tests

ST affectcd nematode species differenrly (Fig. 126. At 200 pg/mi, ST was toxic

to bacterial- and fimgal-feeding nematodes such as B. xylophilus. B. mucronatus, A.

rhythm and C. eleguns, but not to J2s of M. incognito or to Us of the entomopathogenic

nematode H. megidis 90. The mortality of the fint four species was proportional to the

Page 124: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 11. Arrangement of filter paper dises on the surface of an agar Petri àiih (100 x

15 mm) in relation to the point of introduction (O) of nematodes for chemosensory

tests. 1,2 and 3 represent the discs with different doses of indok or 3,5dihydroxy4-

isopropylstilbene (ST). The higbest dosage is nt disc 3, and C is the control disc.

S d e r dishes (60 x 15 mn) were uscd in tests for Meloidogyne inmgnith, where

both b and d were decreased to 0.9 cm but the diameter of the nematode inoculation

site (O) and the disa C, 1,Z and 3 rrmsined at 0e6 cm.

Page 125: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 126: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 12. Nematicidal activity of (a) 3,s-dlhydroxy4-isopropybtilbene (ST) and (b)

indole against nematodes of Merent species in test solutions in small Petri dishes.

AP: Aphelenchoidcs rhytium; BC: Bumapheienchus xylophilus; 41426: B.

xylophilus; France: B. nrucmnatus; CE: Caenorhabditis eleganr; MI: Meloidogyne

incognita; R90: Heterorhabditis megidis; HMD: tletemthbditis sp.

Page 127: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 128: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

concentration of ST and reached 100% at the highest concentration tested. Higher

concentrations of ST were not tested against J2s of M. incognita and Us of H. megidis 90

due to its relative insolubility.

Indole was nematicidal against dl nematode species tested, including

entomopathogenic nematodes, at concentrations greater than 200 pglml (Fig. 12b).

However, Us of the entomopathogenic nematodes, H. megidis 90 and Heterorhabditis sp.

HMD, were more resistant to indole than were the other nematode species. Indole also

caused a high percentage of paralysis of M. incognita and Bursaphelenchus spp. at 100 -

300 ~g lrn l and Heterorhabditis sp. HMD at 400 - 800 pghl (Fig. 13).

2-stilbenol, a known nematicidal compound, was more toxic than was ST to B.

xyiophilus BC and 100% mortality was achieved at 6.25-12.5 pg/ml.

Mortality of the nematodes in dl the controls was less than 5%.

5.3.1.2 Effect of indole on migration of J2s of Meloidogyne incognita in sand column

Indole significantly inhibited the mobility of J2s of M. incognita at concentrations

equal to or higher than 50 pg/rnl (P < 0.05) (Fig. 14). The percentage inhibition was

proportional to increased concentrations of indole. At 200 pg/mi or higher none of the J2s

of M. incognita migrated through the sand column into the test solutions. In contmt,

mon than 95% 12s migrated down the columns in controls within 24 h of incubation. The

nsults parallel the observations in immersion tests that indole caused a high percentage

paralysis of J2s of M. incognita at low concentrations (Fig. 13).

Page 129: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 13. Percentage mortPlity and paralysis of (a) Bumphelenchus xylophilus BC

(juveniles and adults), (b) Meloidogyne incognüa (second stage juveniles) and (c)

Heterorhabditis sp. HMD (ideetive juveniles) fo11owing immersion in indole

solutions at different concentrations.

Page 130: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Mortality and paral ysis (96) of Heterorhabditis sp. HMD

Moatality and paralysis (%) of Mortality and paral ysis (%) of Bumphelenchur xylophilus

Page 131: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 14. Inhibitory effat of indok on mobiiity of second stage juveaües (529) of

Meloidogyne incognila in a sand column &et 24 h tmtment. Migration (%) = (No.

of 12s that migrated into the test soiution at the bottom of the test tube)/( Total No.

of 52s that migrated into the solution at the bottom of the test tube and those

remained in the sand) x 100. Bars with the same letter are not significantly difiecent

(P c 0.05).

Page 132: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

wattr solven t 50 100 200 400

Concentration of indole (pghl)

Page 133: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

5.3.2 Effect of ST and indole on egg hatch of the nematodes

Both ST and indole significantiy inhibited egg hatch of M. incognita (Table 14).

The egg hatch of M. incognita was inhibited at 100 and 200 pglrnl ST over 5 d cornpared

with the solvent control. but hatching resumed somewhat when the egg sacs were placed

subsequently in water. The total egg hatch over the 10 d period for eggs treated in 200

pglml ST was significantly lower than in the solvent conbols (P < 0.05) (Table 14).

Indole significantly inhibited egg hatch of M. incognita at concentrations equal or

higher than 25 pg/m1 (P < 0.05) (Table 14). It almost completely inhibited egg hatch at

100 pg/ml over 5 d. For those eggs treated previously at 200 pg./ml indole solution egg

hatch did not resume but did after lower concentrations although only to a smdl extent

after ûeatment with 100 pg/ml (Table 14).

ST significantly inhibited egg hatch of B. nylophilus BC at 50 and LOO pg/ml ( P c

0.05) (Table 15).

5.3.3 In vivo activity of indole on Meloidogyne incognita

5.3.3.1 Effect of indole on nematode infection via soi1 application

The results of the first expenment demonstrated that indole did not inhibit either

the percentage penetration of J2s of M. incognita into the tomato seedlings or the

development of the nematodes inside the mot system when tested at concentrations

between 50 - 200 pghi (Table 16). No signifcant difference was observed between

indole and control matments (both water and solvent controls) (P c 0.05). As well, by

20d post-inoculation more than 90% nematodes inside the mots had developed into

Page 134: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 14. Inbibitory eRect of 3$.dihydmxy4isopmpylstilbene (ST) and indole on

the percentage of egg hatch of Meloidogyne incognita over 5 d followed by

immersion in distilled water for anothsr 5 d

Concentration Hatch rate (%)* in Hatch rate (%) in

wp/d) ST water Final indole water Final

5 d 5 d 5 + 5 d 5 d 5 d S + 5 d

--______________-----YI - Solvent lûû(so1vent) 100 lûûa 1 OO(so1vent) 100 1 OOa

Water 86.O(water) 9 1.2 86.3ab 8 1.9(water) 1 15.1 98.3a

Data are means of the treatment (n=9). nt: not tested. Means in the sarne column

followed by the same letter are not significantly different (P < 0.05).

*: Hatch rate (%)=(No. of J2s hatched in test sample)/No. of J2s hatched in soivent

control sarnp1e)x 100.

Page 135: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 15. E f k t of J95dUiydroxy4-isoprnpyIstilbene (ST) on percentage of egg

hatch of Bu~~apkelenchus xyloplritus BC

Concentration

of ST (pg/ml)

6.25 82.6 f 1.4a

12.5 83.3 f 2.9a

25 86.0 L 0.7a

50 70.2 f 3.2b

LOO 41.4 f 3.5~

- Water 86.7 f 1.4a

1 % ethanol 90.9f l.la

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=3). Means followed by the same letier are not

significantly different (P < 0.05).

Page 136: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 16. Effet of indole on infection of tomto seedlings by second stage juveniies

of Meloidogyne incognüa in sand application tests

Concentration Expriment I Expriment [I

of indole No. of galls No. of nernatodes No. of galls No. of nematodes

(W/ml) per seedling per seedling

50 48.2 i: 5.0a 80.4 I 7.4a 56.7 f 3.0ab 96.3 f 4.4a

1 0 0 44.1 L 3. la 75.6 I 5.0a 68.5 f 7.2a 108 f 9.6a

200 41.1f6.7a 78.2I12.9a 55 I 1 .Sab 88.2 st: 4.7a

- -II-

10 (Oxamyl) O I Ob O i O b O f Oc O +Ob

Water 43.5 f 3.2a 72.5 i 6.Sa 55.7 f 4.3ab 88.4 f 4.6a

Solvent 39.7 f 4.0a 80.9 I 7. la 49.9 i S.Ob 87.8 f 4.6a

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=lO). Means in the same column foiiowed by the

same letter are not significantîy different (P < 0.05).

Page 137: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

mature females with fully developed reproductive systems and about 5 - 10% of hem had

started egg laying.

In contrast. the commercial nematicide, oxamyl, cornpletely pnvented the

infection of the tomato seedlings by J2s of M. incognita at 10 pglml under the same test

conditions (Table 16). The above results were confirmed by a repeat experiment (Table

16).

5.3.3.2 Effect of indole on nematode infection via foliage application

The results of the first experiment demonstrated that indole did not inhibit

percentage petration of J2s of M. incognita into tomato seedlings or nematode

development inside the rwt system after the seedlings were treated at concentrations

between 50 to 400 pg/ml (Table 17). No significant difference was observed between

indole and control treatments (both water and solvent controls) (P c 0.05). The

developmental stages of the nematodes inside the rwt system of treated plants were

similar to those in the control plants.

Contrary to the nsuits in the soi1 application experiments, the commercial

nematicide, oxamyl, was inactive when sprayed onto foliage of the tomato seeâiings at 50

pghl under the same test conditions as indole and control treatments.

The above results were confumed in a repeat experiment where the highest

concentration of indole was increased to 1,000 pghl and that of oxamyl was increased to

1 ûû pg/d (Table 17).

Page 138: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 17. Effect of indole on infection of tomato seedîiigs by second stage juveniles

of Meloidogyne incogniki in foliage spray tests

-

Concentration Experiment 1 Expairnent IX

of indole No. of galls No. of nematodes No. of galls No. of nematodes

(iidd) per seedling per seedling

50 30.6 f 2.7a 72.5 f 6.8a nt nt

100 3 1.6 f 4.2a 76.8 * 9.2a nt nt

200 29.4 f 2-51 65 k 7.7a 34.7 f 1.9a 72.9 f 5.8a

400 43.6 k 6.3a 90.1 f 12a 42.2 f 2.3a 8 1.3 f 5.7a

1,m nt nt 42.4 f 4.4a 72.6 f 4.6a

-- H u u . . - " - H I I I - H - - - - - _ U U U _ _ U U U _ _ U U U _

50 (Oxarnyl) 34.1 f 4.0a 70.4 fi 7.2a nt nt

100 nt nt 40f1 .7a 81.3f5.8a

Water 34 i 4.6a 75.5 f 10.1 a 43.8 f 2.9a 88.6 f 8.4a

Solvent 33.Lf2.7a 72.2k7.Sa 36.2 f 2.9a 74.1 f 7.7a

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=8 for experiment 1; n=10 for experirnent [D.

nt: not tested. Means in the same column followed by the same letter are not significantiy

different (P c 0.05).

Page 139: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

5.3.4 Nematicidal activity of some indole derivatives

Several indole derivatives showed nematicidal activity against B. xylophilus BC

and their activities were structure-dependent (Table 18). An additional nitro group or a

chloide group on the benzene ring of indole, such as 5-nitroindole or 5-chlorideindole,

increased the nematicidal activity significantly compared with indole. Addition of other

groups on the benzene ring generally decreased activity. The location of the same

functional group on the benzene ring aiso influenced the activity. CMethoxylindole, for

example, had lower nematicidal activity than 6- methoxylindole. Most groups attached to

position 3 of the pyrrole ring of indole decrease the nematicidal activity of the

compounds. Addition of hydrogen atoms at positions 2 and 3 (indoline) of the pyrrole

ring of indole also decreased the nematicidal activity of the compound compared with

indole (Table 18).

The nematicidal effect of indole derivatives on B. xylophilus BC was similarly to

that of indole (Fig. 13). The nematodes were paralyzed at lower concentrations of the

compounds and were killed at higher concentrations. Consequently. the compounds had

lower ECs but relatively higher LC, values (Table 18).

5.3.5 Chemosensory effect of ST and indole on nematodes

Nematode species responded differentiy to ST and indole sources on the aga

surface of the plates. They either were repelled, paralyzed/killed or not affected when

exposed on an agar plate to paper discs containhg ST or indole (Fig 15; Table 19). The

Us of most, but not al1 species of Steinemema. were repelled by ST as shown by the clear

zones amund the paper discs of O. 1 pg ST or p a t e r (Fig. 15a; Table 19) at 0.5 - 2 h. The

Page 140: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 18. Nenistickln1 activity of some indole de rivatives aginst Bursaphelenchus

xyîophifus BC in immersion tests

indole

indoline

5-aminoindole

5-chloroindole

5- h ydrox y i ndole

Cmethox y lindole

5-methoxylindole

6-methoxy lindole

5-nitroindole

5-methylindole

indole-3-acetic acid

tryptophan

tryptophol

5-methoxy lindole-

3-acetic acid

None

None

L: 5-NH2

5-Cl

5-OH

4-WH3

5-WH3

6-0CH3

SNO2

5-CH3

R: 3-CH2COOH

3-CH2-CH(NH&COOH

3-CHrCH@H

R + L: S-OCH3 (R) and

3-CH2-COOH (L)

-- - -

*: R: side chah or group attached to the benzene ring of the indole skeleton. L: side chah

or group attached to the pyrrole ring of the indole skeleton.

ECm: concentration causing paralysis and mortality in 50% of test nernatodes.

&: concentration causing mortaiity in 50% of test nematodes.

Page 141: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 15. A diagrammatic represenbtion showing the influence of 3,S-dihydroxy-4-

isopropylstilbene (ST) and indole on dispersal behaviour of dinerent nematode

specks on Petri dishes. (a): Repelling effct: nematodes were repelled from a disc

containing the test substance. (b): Toxic eff'crt: nematodes that moved near a d i s

containing the test substance became inmobile or dead and they accumulatd

around the disr. (c): No effert: nematdes continued to move rondomly over the

plate.

Page 142: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 143: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 19. Chemosensory effcet of 3$~ibydmxy4-isopropylstilbene (ST) and indole

on dirrerent nematode species when tested at 0.1,1,10 and 100 Wdisc in 1.5% agar

plaîes.

Nematodes ST Effective bdole Effective

dosage dosage

R* T* N* (pg/disc) R T N (pgdisc)

Bursaphelenchus xylophilus

Meloidogyne incognita

Heterorhabditis sp. HMD

Heterorhabditis sp. Spain

H. bacteriophora Oswego

H. marelatus

H. megidis 90

Steinemema carpocapsae BI

S. feltiae CH-S-MER + S. glaseri NC 19 i

S. glaseri + S. kushidai + S. puertoricense

S. riobrave Rio

*: R: repelling effect; T: toxic effect; N: no effect (please refer to the text for details).

**: response observed under the category.

Page 144: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

size of the clear area increased with time and the zones persisted for at least 24 h. ST is

apparently toxic to B. xylophilus BC as shown by the zone of increased numbers of

p d y z e d and/ or distorted nematodes near the paper discs of 10 pg ST. More nematodes

accumulated around the discs as they became imrnobilized and some of these nematodes

were dead after lh (Table 19; Fig. 15b). However, dispersal behaviour of J2s of M.

incognita, Us of al1 Heterorhabditis spp. and some Steinernema spp. tested was not

affected by ST (Table 19; Fig. 1 5c).

In contrast, indole had an effect on the Us of some species of both Heterorhabditis

and Steinemema (Table 19). It repelled the Us of Steinernema spp. tested at dosage of

1 00 pg/disc. Us of Heterorhabditis sp. HMD were repelled by indole at 0.1 pg/disc of

indoie at 0.5 - 2 h but H. megidis 90 was not affected at 100 pgidisc over 2 h. Unlike ST,

indole was toxic to both M. incognita and B. xyiophilus at 100 pgldisc (Table 19; Fig.

15b), but the mobility of these two species resumed foilowing gentle vibration or light

stimuli. Unlike ST, the effect of indole continued for more than 2 h, after which its effect

gradually diminished and eventuaily vanished.

5.4 Discussion

This series of experiments showed that both ST and indole are nematicidai against

a variety of nematode species in that the compounds diminished nematode viability,

mobility and egg hatch. In particular, the study demonstrated also that ST and indole

influenced the behaviour of IJs of Steinememu spp. and Heterorhabditis spp., the

respective syrnbionts of the bacteria that produced the ST and/or indole.

Page 145: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

In the present study, ST, a stilbene derivative, was shown to be more active

against bacterial- and fungal-feeding nematodes, such as A. rhyrium, C. elegans and

Bursaphelenchus spp. than to the plant-parasitic nematode, M. incognita. or the

entomopathogenic nematode, H. megidis 90. The reason for the differential effect of ST is

not clear. The nematicidal activity of some other stilbene derivatives from such plants as

Cednrs deodara and Pinus massoniana, have been reported (Mohammad et al., 1992;

Suga et al. 1993; Suga, 1994). The mode of action of the nematicidal stilbene derivatives

is unknown, but it was shown (Suga et al., 1993) to be different from that of the

commercially available insecticides and nematicides including the organophosphorus and

the carbamoyl compounds which operate by inhibiting acetylcholinesterase (Opperman

and Chang, 1 990).

Indole caused a high percentage of paralysis of nematode species tested at lower

concentrations but of a high percentage of mortality at relatively high concentrations. The

inhibitory effect of indole on nematode mobility was confirmed by sand column

experiments where the J2s of M. incognita that were exposed to 100 pg/ml or higher

indole solution were not able to migrate through the column (Fig. 14). However, indole

failed to prevent the infection of the tomato seedlings by J2s of M. incognita when it was

applied at 200 pg/ml to the sand (Table 16). This Faiailure may possibly have been due to

indole's adsorption by sand particles, its rapid breakâown due to unstability, or to the

volatility of indole. In sand column tests, the nematodes were constantiy exposed to the

indole solution (Fig. 10). but in sand application tests. the nematodes' mobility following

initial paraiysis might have resumed following a decrease in indole concentrations due to

its sublimation. This was supported by the observation that the white Cotton plug of the

Page 146: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

via1 containing the tomato seedling tumed orange-brown 2 d p s t indole application, an

indication of photochernical reaction of indoles exposed to ait and light (Remers, 1972).

Also, preliminary experiments indicated that J2s of M. incognita exposed to indole

solutions (100 - 200 pg/ml) in an immersion test for 24 h regained their rnobility after

king transferred to distilled water.

Indole did not prevent infection of the tomato seedlings by J2s of M. incognita as

a foliage spray, even when the concentration of indole solution was as high as 1,000

pg/d. This may have been due to result €rom poor uptake of indole by the leaflet of the

seedling or its unstability when exposed to light and air (Remers, 1972). The systemic

nematicide, oxamyl, was inactive too as a foliar application, although it completely

prevented the infection of M. incognita at 10 pg/d via sand application. The inactivity of

the foliar application of oxamyl is more likely to have been due to low concentration used

in this study, because Stephan and Tmdgill (1983) reported that foliar spray of oxamyl

solution (1,000 to 2,000 pglrnl) to tomato seedlings before inoculation of M. hapla

pmvided partial protection.

Several commercially available indole derivatives showed nematicidal activity

against B. xylophilus. and their activities were structure-dependent. The side chains or

groups when attached to both the benzene and pyrrole ring of indole may influence each

other and thus influence the activity of the compound. 5-Methoxylindole, for example,

has an 0CH3 group on the benzene ring of indole and had a ECSo of 243 pg/d. However,

when an acetic acid group was attached at position 3 of its pyrrole ring to form 5-

methoxylindole-3-acetic acid, the nematicidal activity of the latter disappeared (Table

Page 147: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

18). Compared with indole, several indole derivatives were more potent against B.

xylophilus, and hither exploration of indole derivatives may help to develop nematicides.

Both ST and indole influenced nematode behaviour (Table 19; Fig. 15). but they

differ in several respects. Indole caused paralysis of M. incognita and B. xylophilus

around the high dosage discs in agar plates. This observation coincides with the fact that

both M. incognita and B. xylophilus were paralyzed by indole at lower concentrations in

the immersion tests (Fig. 13). Since the nematodes that moved closed to the disc were

paraiyzed and remained there while other nematodes continued to move forward from the

inoculation site, the nematodes accumulated around the disc and gave the false

impression of having been attracted. indole repelled Us of some species of both

Steinemema and Heterorhabditis. Both the repelling and toxic effects of indole on the

nematodes in the plates tended to diminish over time, probably due to its volatilization.

Unlike indole, ST repels only Us of some species of Steinemema, and the

effective dosage could be as low as 0.1 Wdisc. The results confinn the fact that ST is

produced only by Photorhubdus spp., the symbiont of Heterorhabditis spp., and it could

be expected that such nematicidal metabolites would not repel the respective nematode

symbiont.

In conclusion, both ST and indole were demonstrated to be nematicidal against

several nematode species especially bacterial- and hingal-feeding nematodes. ST and

indole were shown also to influence the behaviour of entomopathogenic nematodes. To

better understand the occumnce and biological d e s of these nematicidal metabolites in

the tripartite nematode-bacterium-insect association, hirther study of them under in vivo

conditions was necessary.

Page 148: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CHAFTER 6

IN V ' OCCURRENCE OF NEMATICIDAL METABOLITES IN

RELATION TO BACTERIAL GROIiVTH AND NEMATODE DEVELOPMENT

6.1 Introduction

Xenorhbdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. produce in culture broth secondary

metabolites, such as ammonia, ST and indole, that have nematicidal properties. This

discovery is significant in that these bacteria are themselves symbiotically associated with

the nematodes, Steinernema spp. and Heterorhabditis spp., respective1 y. ST occurs in the

culture broths of several strains and species of Photorhabdus (Paul et al., 198 1; Li et al.,

1995b; Table 10). Indole is produced by several species of Xenorhabdus and

Photorhabdur under in vitro conditions (Farmer, 1995; Table 13). However, little

information is available about the production of ST and indole and other antibiotics by

different bacterial syrnbionts under in vivo conditions (Maxwell et al., 1994; Jarosz,

1996). The availability of such information may help increase our undentanding of their

possible biological role in the life history of these nematode - bacterial complexes.

Consequently, a series of expeciments were done to investigate the time course of

occurrence of ST and indole in nematode-infected lacval G. mellonella in relation to the

growth of Photorhabdus and development of Heterorhubditis.

6.2 Illilrrteriais and methods

6.2.1 G. mellonella larvae and entomopathogenic nematodes

Heterorhabditis bacteriophora Oswego, H. mareiatus, H. megidis 90,

Page 149: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Heterorhabditis sp. HMD and Heterorhabditis sp. Spain (Table 4) and G. mellonella

were cultured and collected as described in section 2.2.

6.2.2 Detection and identification of indole from nematode-infected larval cadavers of G.

mellonella

Infective juveniles of H. megidis 90 that haâ passed through two layers of WS

paper tissue were collected, washed. concentrated in distilled water, then applied to the

surface of filter papers (Waterman No.1) in Petri dishes (10 x 100 mm). Twenty-five last

instar larvae of G. mellonella (- 0.2 g/îarva) were placed on the surface of the filter

papers in each of two Petri dishes that had been inoculated with a suspension of

thousands of Us of H. megidis 90. The dishes were kept in an incubator at 25OC in the

darlc. At 4 d after incubation, al1 dead, nematode-infected cadavers had turned reddish-

brown. The cadavers from the two dishes were homogenized in acetone (10 ml each time)

using a small mortar. The homogenization and extraction processes were repeated severai

times with fresh solvent until the solvent extract was colorless. Al1 the extracts were then

combined, dned in a rotary evaporator under vacuum and re-extracted with 5 ml

methanol each time until the methanol extracts were colorless. The concentrated

methanol solution after evaporation (-10 ml) was useâ for both indole and ST detection

and identification, as described below.

Ten microliter of the concentrated methanol extract was applied to a TLC plate (3

x 9 cm) together with indole (Sigma@) as the refennce. The TU= plate was developed in

a 10 ml mixture of methanol and chloroform (1.5 : 985, v/v) in a 200 ml beaker that was

Page 150: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

sealed with alurninum foil. The method for detection and identification of indole was the

sarne as that described in section 4.2.4.3.

Twenty-five, healthy larval G. mellonella were extracted and tested sirnilarly to

that described above, to serve as the control.

6.2.3 Detection of indole over time in larval cadavers of G. mellonella infected with P.

luminescens UD

An experiment was done to investigate whether indole is produced by the

bacterium in the insect cadavers in the absence of the nematode symbiont. To prepare the

bacterial inoculum, a single, 48 h-old primary form colony of P. luminescens MD grown

in TSAD plate was subcultured on a TSA plate for 48 h. The bacterial cells from the TSA

plate culture were then suspended in sterilized 0.8% NaCl solution, and the ce11 density

was adjusted to 5,000 celldpl. Into each of the selected 1st instar larvae of G. rnellonella

(-0.2 g/larva) 2 pi of the bacterial suspension was injected. The lame were then

incubated at 2S°C in the dark. At 0. 3, 6, 12, 24,48 and 72 h, then every altemate day

until 21 d and at 27 d, t h samples. each of five Iarvae, were chosen randomly from

among the bacteria-injected larvae and each sample was homogenized separately in a

small mortar with acetone, followed by methanol extraction, as described above. The

TU: and W spectmm analysis were performed as described in section 6.2.2. Five l ame

injected with only 0.8% NaCl were extracted and tested similady, to serve as the control.

To confirrn that the above prepared bacteid inonilum was indole-producing

under in vitro conditions, 1 ml of the above bacterid suspension was added into each of

two flaslcs (125 ml) containing 50 ml TSB and cultuced, as desc~lbed in section 2.2 for 2

Page 151: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

or 4 d. Indole production in the culture broth was examined directiy, using Ehrlich's

reagent method (Holding and Collee, 1971). and indirectly, using TU= and W spectmm

analysis, after extracting the organic fraction of the broth (refer to section 4.2.4.3).

To further confirm that the bacteria inside the infected cadavers retained their

ability to produce indole, though they might not produce it, the bacterium was re-isolated

from the infected insect cadavers and cultured in TSB for indole detection, as described

below. To re-isolate the bacteria, three larvae were selected randomly from the above

injected larvae at each of 1,2,5,8, 10, 15 and 29 d post injection. At each sampling time

the cadavers' body surface was cleaned by washing three times with TSB, then the lame

were homogenized with 2 ml TSB in a small mortar. The macerated material containing

the cells of the bacterial syrnbiont was transferred to a glass vial and diluted with TSB.

The bacteria were transferred and inoculated ont0 TSAD plates using an inoculating loop.

The plates were sealed and incubated at Z0C in the dark. At 48 h, the primary form

colonies of the bacterium were inoculated into a 125 ml flask containing 50 ml TSB and

cultured for 2 dl as described in section 2.2. Indole production was examined using

Ehrlich's reagent method, and TU3 and UV spectrum analyses.

6.2.4 Isolation and identification of ST from infected larval cadavers of G. mellonella

To confirm the presence of ST in the extract prepared as described in section

6.2.2, HPLC analysis of the methanol extract was performed using a Waters 626 liquid

chromatograph. The mobile phase was acetonit.de and water, which was sparged prior to

use. The mobile phase was delivered at 1.2 mUmin to a 250 x 4.6 mm Nucleosil 5 C,,

column (Phenomenex, Rmcho Palos Verdes, CA, USA) using the following pro-

Page 152: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

(prepared by Dr. J. Li): 15% acetonitrile in water for 1 min, followed by a linear gradient

to 62% acetonitrile in water for 20 min, and isocratic (62% acetonitrile in water) for 5

min. The eluate was passed through a Waters 484 tunable absorbante detector set at 3 15

nm. The results of the anaiysis were recorded with a Waters 746 data module. ST served

as a refennce in HPLC analysis. The metabolite that was collected had the same retention

time as that of the standard ST d u h g HPLC separation of the methanol extract. It was

dried on a rotary evaporator under vacuum and analyzed for MS data and its W

spectrum, as described in chapter 4.2.4.3.

To further vetify the antibacteriai property of the collected metabolite, an agar-

diffusing bioassay, as described in section 24, was performed.

6.2.5. Quantitative analysis of ST from nematode-infected larval cadavers of G.

melionella

6.2.5.1 Standard curve of ST for HPLC analysis

Standard solutions of ST w e n prepared by dissolving ST in methanol, then

diluting two-fold in methanol to give a series of ST solutions with concentrations of

1,000, 5 0 , 250, 125, 62.5, 3 1.25, 15.6, 7.8, 3.9, 1.95 pg/m.i. Twenty inicroliter of each

standard solution was injected for HPHP analysis, using the program as descnbcd in

section 6.2.4. The standard curve of ST, C n(wm = 0.150 + 4.494A (R2 = 0.9999). was

established for standard solutions with concentrations of ST from 1.95 pglrnl to 62.5

pglml where C ma is the comsponding concentration of ST @@mi) in the sample

injected into the HPLC system with a fmed volume of 20 pl and A is the area recorded

(recorded uniWlûû,ûûû, at 3 15 nm).

Page 153: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

6.2.5.2 Selection of extracting solvent

To quantitatively analyze ST in infected insect cadavers, the appropriate solvent

had to be chosen that extracted as much ST as possible from the infected cadavers. Four

solvents, narnely acetone. ethyl acetate, methanol and diethyl ether, were tested for their

extraction efficacy following the sarne extraction procedure.

Infective juveniles of H. megidis 90 were collected and surfaced sterilized, as

described in section 2.2, and the nematode suspension was adjusted to 6,250 Us /ml of

PBS prior to injection into the insect larvae. Larval G. melloneh (-0.2 g/larva) were

each injected with about 25 Us in 4 pl PBS and kept at 2S°C in the dark. At 3 d post

injection, three sarnples, each of five cadavers, were selected randomly from the infected

cadavers for extraction by one of the solvents. Each of the three samples was immersed

separately in a mortar containing 3 ml of the solvent and homogenized. The resulting

liquid extract was transfemd into a 25 ml flask. The residues were recxtracted with 1 ml

of the same solvent four times and centrifbged at 13,000 g whenever necessary. Al1 the

extracts from the sarne sample were combined in the sarne 25 ml flask and dned under

vacuum below 30°C. The dried material was re-dissolved in 1 ml methanol, transferred to

a centrifuge tube (1.5 ml) and centrifuged (13,000 g). The supernatant was decanted.

diluted 100-times with rnethanol and 20 pJ of the diluted solution subjected to HPLC

analysis, as described in section 6.2.4, to detemine the recovery efficacy of the test

solvents on ST extraction. Based on the area recorded for the HPLC analysis of each

replicate, the concentration of the injected solution was calculated from the standard

Page 154: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

HPLC curve for ST. The ST concentration in the original methanol solution was obtained

by multiplying by the number of dilution times for the sample for HPLC analysis.

6.2.5.3 Recovery efficacy of ST using acetone

Two standard ST solutions, with concentrations of 25 pg/N and 2.5 pg/pl, were

prepared by dissolving ST in DMSO. Each of five, healthy G. mellonella larvae was

injected with 5 pl of a standard ST solution and immediately irnmersed in a mortar

containing 3 ml acetone. Al1 the five larvae had been injected in less than 1 min and were

immediately homogenized together. They were then extracted using acetone as described

in section 6.2.5.2. The supernatant of the extract was first diluted with methanol50-times

(for lame injected with standard solution with a concentration of 25 pg/pl) or 10-times

(for the larvae injected with standard solution with a concentration of 2.5 pg/)rl) to fit the

linear range of the standard curve established for HPLC analysis, then analyzed to

determine the recovery efficacy. Twenty microliter of each diluted sample was injected

into HPLC each tirne. The study was repeated three times.

6.2.6 Occurrence of ST and indole in relation to the development of Heterorhabditis and

growth of Photorhubdus in l and G. rnellonella cadavers

The entomopathogenic nematodes used were H. megidis 90 and Heterorhabditis

sp. HMD, from which bacteriai symbionts, P. lminescens C9 and P. liainescens MD,

respectively, were isolated. Both P. luminescens C9 and P. luminescens MD were known

to pduce ST and indole in broth culturcs (Fig. 9).

Page 155: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

6.2.6.1 G. mellonella - H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens C9 complex

A. Occurrence of ST and indole

Last instar larval G. mellonella (-0.2 g/iarva) were carehilly selected, and the

average weight (AW) of every €ive larvae was detemiined by weighing six groups of five

randornly selected Iarvae. Al1 the lame were than injected with surface sterilized IJs of

H. megidis 90 (-25 UsAarva ), carrying the symbiont P. luminescens Cg, and kept in an

incubator at 25OC in the dark. At each sampling tirne (0, 3, 6, I2, 24, 48 and 72 h, then

every altemate day until2 1 d, and also at 27 d after infection) three sarnples, each of five

randomly selected larvae were homogenized separately in a small mortar with acetone,

processed and reextracted in methanol following the extraction procedures as described in

section 6.2.5.2. The concentrations of ST and indole in the methanol in each of the three

sarnples at each sampling time were quantified using TU=-W methods, as described in

section 4.2.4.3. The concentration of ST or indole (Clglg wet insect tissue) at each

sampling time was determined by dividing the total arnount of ST or indole in each

sample with the AW, which was detennined at the beginning of the experiment.

Fifteen Iarvae injected with only PBS scrved as controls in the experiment. The

experiment was repeated once except that the sampies were collected at 1, 2, 3, 5.7, 12,

17,22 and 27 d after infection.

B. Development of H. megidis 90

To monitor the development of H. megidis 90 inside the infccted G. mellonella

larvae, three aâditional larvae selected nuidomly h m the above injected larvae were

Page 156: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

dissected under the stereo microscope (25 X) at each sampling time and the

developmental stages of the nematodes recorded. The experiment w u cepeated once.

C. Population dynamics of P. luminescens C9

Last instar larval G. mellonella (-0.2 gAarva) were selected and the AW was

determined by weighing six groups of five, randomly selected larvae. The larvae were

each injected with 4 pl of PBS containing about 25 Us of H. megais 90 that were

collected, surface sterilized and concentrated in PBS buffer, as described in section 2.2,

then incubated at 2S°C in the dark. At 0,3, 6, 12,24,48 and 72 h after injection, then on

altemate days until day 27 after injection, five injected larvae were rûndomly collected,

their body surface washed clean three times with TSB, then the larvae were homogenized

with 2 ml of TSB in a small mortar. The macerated material was transferred to a

measuring bottle and adjusted to 10 ml with TSB. Standard dilution-plating methods were

followed, then the TSAD plates with bacterial cells were incubated. After 48 h

incubation, the CFü (colony-forming unit) of P. luminesceni per plate was recorded and

converted to CFUIg wet insect tissue based on the dilution times of the macerated

material and AW. The identity of the bacteria on the plates was confirmed by their

morphological, biochernical and physiological characteristics as defined by Thomas and

Poinar (1983), Boemare and Akhurst (1988) and Boemare et al. (1993a). The above

process of homogenization and dilution-plating was repeated for samples collected at

each sampling tirne. Five larvae injected with PBS alone served as a control. The above

process was perfonned under standard stede conditions, and the experiment was

repeated once.

Page 157: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

D. pH changes of infected larval G. mellonella

The nematode-infected larval cadavers of G. mellonella were prepared, as

described above, and the samples were collected at 0,3,6, 12,24,48 and 72 h, then every

altemate day until 27 d. At each sarnpling tirne, three groups, each of three larvae, were

chosen randomly from among the infected larval cadavers and homogenized in 2 ml

distilled water. Immediately, the pH of the macerated material was measured using a pH

meter. The sarne process was repeated at each sarnpling time. Larvae injected with PBS

alone served as controls. The experiment was repeated once.

6.2.6.2 G. mellonelfa - Heterorhabditis sp. HMD - P. luminescens MD complex

Occurrence of ST and indole, development of Heterorhabditis sp. HMD and the

population dynamics of its bacterial symbiont, P. luminescens MD plus the pH of

nematode-infected larval cadavers of G. mellonella were investigated. The methods were

the same as those descnbed above for the G. mellonella - H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens

C9 complex.

6.2.7 Occurrence of ST and indole in larval G. mellonella cadaven infected by different

Photorhabdus spp. - Heterorhabditis spp. complexes

To detemine if ST and indole are pduced UI vivo by different bacterid

symbionts following the infection of G. mellonella by the respective Heterorhabditis

spp., Ils of H. maraietus, Heterorhabditis sp. Oswego, Heterorhabditis sp. Spain,

Heterorhubditiir sp. HMD and H. megidis 90 were collected and surface sterilized, as

Page 158: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

described in section 2.2. They were concentrated in sterilized PBS buffer to 6,250 Uslm1

before use.

Last instar G. rnellonella larvae (-0.2 g/îarva) were each injected with 4 pl

nematode suspension containing about 25 Us of one of the four nematode species/isolates

listed above. Fifteen lame were injected with each nernatode speciedisolate. The

injected larvae were incubated at 2S°C in the dark until 7 d after injection. Cadaven

infected by each of the four nematode species were grouped randomly into three samples

with five larvae in each sample. Each sample of cadavea was weighed. homogenized.

extracted and concentrated in 1 ml methanol, as described in section 6.2.5.2. The

concentration of ST and indole in each sample was then detemiined using the TLC-UV

methods described in section 4.2.4.3.

6.3 Results

6.3.1 Detection of indole from larval cadavers of G. mellonella infefted by H. megidis 90

Several colorful and UV detectable metabolites showed on the TLC plates ;ifter

the plates, which were applied with extract from infected larval cadavea, had been

developed. However, no indole-like band, compared to indole sample (ceference). was

detectable on the TU3 plates. The control sample, pnpared fiom healthy larvae, did not

show any colorful or W detectable band on the TU: plates.

6.3.2 Detection of indole from larval cadavers of G. mellonella injected with P.

luminescens MD alone

The TU3 method failed to detect the occurrence of indole in the cadaver extracts

Page 159: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

collected dunng the whole 27 d period p s t bacterial injection. However, the same

bacterial suspension that was left over after larval injection produced indole when it was

inoculated to TSB and cultured for either 2 or 4 d.

Al1 the bacterial cultures of P. luminescens MD, which were re-isolated from the

bacterial-injected larval G. mellonella cadavers at 2, 5 , 8 15 and 19 d post injection,

produced indole in TSB medium in flasks except the bacteria isolated from the cadaver

24 h post injection.

6.3.3 Isolation and identification of SI' from larval cadavers of G. mellonella infected by

H. megidis 90

ST had a retention time of about 24.2 min in the HPLC profile. One of the

metabolites from the extracts of larval G. rnellonella cadavers infected by H. megidis 90

had the same retention time under the same HPLC program (Fig. 16). Further MS and UV

spectmm analysis, as well as results from an antibacterial bioassay of the metabolite,

which was collected at this specific retention time, confirmed that the metabolite from

the cadavers was ST. This proved that ST was produced in the larvd cadavers of G.

mellonelh infected by H. megidis 90.

6.3.4 Quantitative analysis of ST from infected larval cadavers of G. mellonella

6.3.4.1 Selection of extracting solvent

The relative extraction efficacy of each solvent is summarized in Table 20.

Acetone extracted significantly more ST than did by other solvents tested (P < 0.05) and.

Page 160: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 16. Cornparison of HPLC c h r o m a t ~ r n s of a typ id test sample extracted

from GdleM rnellonetiu lawae infected with Heterorhabdia megidis 90, as detected

at two dEiferent wavelengths (254 am and 315 nm).

Page 161: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

TlME (min)

Page 162: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 20. Extraction of 3$.dibydroxy4-isopropylsti1bene (ST), using dükrent

solvents, from cadavers of Guiferid mellonella infected by Heterorkabdilis megidis 90

- - - - -- - - -- - --

Solvent Wet weight (g) Area of HPLC Amount (pg) of Arnount of ST

of five cadaven anaiysis ST extracted (pg/g cadavers)

Diethyl ether 0.7 13 f 0.020 1.85 i 0.12 848 f 50 1187 I53d

Methanol 0.68 1 î 0.006 2.94 f 0.23 1337 I 104 1956 i 167c

Ethyl acetate 0.659 f 0.01 1 3.82 f 0.16 1732 I 7 1 2632 i 141b

Acetone 0.710f0.014 4.84f0.19 2192i 86 3085 f 65a

Data are expressed as mean f SE (na) . Means followed by the same letter are not

significantly different (P < 0.05).

Page 163: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

therefore. was selected as the solvent for ST extraction in subsequent experiments.

6.3.4.2 Recovery efficacy of ST by acetone

The results showed that about 95% of ST that was injected into the healthy larvae

was recovered when acetone was used as the extracting solvent (Table 21). Therefore,

this extraction method was used in subsequent quantitative analysis of ST in nematode-

infected larval G. rnellonella cadavers.

6.3.5 Occurrence of ST in relation to the development of Heterorhabditis and growth of

Photorhabdus in lamal G. mellonella cadavers

6.3.5.1 G. mellonella - H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens C9 complex

A. Occurrence of ST over time

No indole was detected in any of the G. mellonella cadavers throughout the 27 d

pend. ST was not detectable in G. mellonella lame during the first 24 h of infection by

the H. megidis 90 - P luminescens C9 complex, but increased rapidly by 48 h to 5 d after

infection (Fig. 17). It remained at a relative constant level for 21 d (-3,000 pg/g wet

insect) before decreasing graduiùly thereafter. As well, it was found that metabolic

components in the extract of the insect cadavers diffend during the first few days of

infection (Fig. 1 8).

The results wen confiimed by a repeated expriment (Fig. 17).

B. Population dynamics of P luminescens C9

Al1 Iarvai G. nrellonella infected by H. megidis 90 died at 48 h post infection and

Page 164: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 21. Recovery of 3,s-dihydroxy4-isopropylstiIbene (ST) with acetone from

healthy Galle& nneltonelkà larvae mected with known amounts of ST

Total ST (pg) Area recorded by ST (pg) present in five Percentage of

injected into five the HPLC method larvae as detemined ST recovered

insect larvae (dilution) by the HPLC method

O (DMSO only) O O

62.5 1.3 1 f 0.03 (10) 60.43 f 0.89 96.7 f 1.4

625 2.61 I O . 11 (50) 593.67 =t 14.71 95.0 1 2.4

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=3).

Page 165: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 17. (a) Occurrence of 3$.dihydmxy4-isopropylsti1bene (ST), (b) population

dynamics of Photorhabdus luminescens C9 and (c) pH of larval cadavers of Galleria

mebnello infixted by Heterorhabditis megidis 90 over Ume iii two repeat

experiments (Exp-1 and Exp-2).

Page 166: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Time &ter infection (days)

Page 167: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 18. TLC chrom~togram of 33-dihydroxy-4-isopropy~tilbene (ST) and of two

test samples extmted fmm Girrlle~ rnellonelh larvae inleetml with Heterorhabdiilis

rnegidis 90, 2 and 5 d (Zd and Sd) af'ter infection. TLC plate (9 x 5.3 cm) was

developed in a mixture of methanol- chlomform (15 : 98.5) in a b d e r seaied with

aluninum foi1 and visualized under UV lamp at (254 am).

Page 168: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (
Page 169: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

tumed nddish brown. Within 24 h of infection the bacterial symbiont, P. lminescens

Cg, and one species of bacterial contaminant were readily isolated from the infected

insect cadavers. The contaminant was probably from the insect alimentary system since

they were present also in the control insects. The population of the bacterial contaminant

decreased rapidly by 24 h and was almost undeiectable at 48 h while P. luminescens

increased greatly to about 2.6 x log CFU/g wet insect at 48 h post infection. The peak

level of P. luminescens reached io 1-2 x 10'' ai about 7 - 9 d post infection before

decreasing gradually thereafter. Only the bactecial contarninants were isolated from

control insect larvae.

The results were confirmed by a repeat experiment (Fig. 17).

C. Development of H. megidis 90 inside the cadavea

It took about 14 d for the nematode to produce large quantities of new Us.

Population peaks of hermaphroditic females, arnphimictic females and new Us occurred

at about 5, 1 1 and 14 d, respectively.

D. pH change of the nematode-infected insect cadavea

The pH of the macerated infected larval cadavers of G. meltonell. dropped

slightly (-0.14.2) during the first 12 h, and then it increased gradually to its peak level at

about 7.6-7.7 at 5 - 7 d p s t infection before decnasing thenafter. The pH nmained

relatively stable (-7.0) fmm 13 - 23 d postinfection and decreased grPdually thereafter

(Fig 17).

Page 170: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

6.3.5.2 G. mellonella - Heterorhabditis sp. HMD - P. luminescens MD complex

A. Occurrence of ST over time

The occurrence of ST and indole in infected G. mellonella cadavers showed a

similar pattern to that described for infection by H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens C9

complex. No indole was detected in any of the G. mellonella cadavers throughout the 27

d period. ST was not detectable in the insect cadavea during the first 24 h of infection by

the Heterorhabditis sp HMD - P. luminescens MD complex (Fig. 19), but increased

rapidly by 48 h and to 1,900 pglg wet insect at 5 d after infection. It remained at a

relatively stable level for 19 d (-1,700 Clglg wet insect) and decreased gradually

thereafter.

B. Population dynamics of P. lwninescens MD

After 48 h infection. al1 infected larval G. mellonella, except controls, died and

tumed orange-brown. Unlike P. luminescens Cg, described above, two distinct colony

types of P. luminescens MD, designated V p and Vsm. w e n detected for the bacterial cells

isolated from the nematode-infected larvae in addition to bacterial contarninants,

Bacterial cells of Vp colonies had al1 the characteristics of the primary form of P.

luminescens, but Vsm lost either completeiy or partly many of the primary form

properties, such as the ability to absorb dye and produce antibiotics (Table 22). The two

colony types showed also very different population dynamics from each other (Fig. 19).

Within 12 h of infection, Vp cells and bacterial contaminants wen nadily isolated hom

the infected insect larvae. At 24 h Vsm cells also were isolated from larvae but in smaller

numbers than those of Vp cells. By 48 h the number of Vp and Vsm cells was nearly

Page 171: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Fig. 19. (a) Occurrence of 3,5.dbydmxy4-i~propy~stilbene (ST), (b) population

dynamics of the primary fonn (Vp) and a sdl-colony variant (Vsm) of

Photorhubdus luminescens MD and (c) pH of Ional cadavers of Gollerià mellonella

infected by Hetemrhabdiîh sp. HMD over time in two repent expiments (Exp-1

and Exp-2).

Page 172: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

O 4 8 12 16 20 24 28

T i i after infection Cdavs)

Page 173: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Table 22. Characteristics of Vp (primary t o m ) and Vsm (smnll-colony variant) of

Photorhabdus luminescens MD

Characteristic* VP Vsm

Gram stain

Ce11 size (p) (range)

Proteinaceous granules

Colony color on TSA

Colony size and f o m

on TSAD

Colony adhesion

Dye absorption

Bromothymol blue

Neutrd red on TSA

Neutra1 red on

MacConkey aga

Pigment difisible on TSA

Catalase

Antibiotic production

Luminescence

Negative

5.0 by 1.3

(3.0 by 1.0 to 8.0 by 1.8)

Yes

Yeilowish

Large; dark green center

with radial strips

Strong

Strong

Strong

Strong

Brown

Yes

Yes

Strong

-- --

Negati ve

2.1 by 0.9

( 1.5 by 0.8 to 3.0 by 1 .O)

No

Light gray

Small; light green and

homogeneous

None

Weak

Weak

Weak

None

Yes (weak)

No

Weak

- -- - - - -

*: Catalase activity was tested by immersing the bactecial mass of 48 h -old Vp and Vsm

cultures fmm TSA plates into 10% hydrogen peroxide and observing the release of

oxygen. Antibiotic production was determined by observing the clear, in hibitory zone

around the agar discs (diameter 6 mm) on Bocillus subtilis plates after incubation (36OC

for 24 h in the dark) (Hickey, 1986). The agar discs were taken separately from 3- to 12-

d s l d Vp and Vsm cultures on TSAD plates. The luainosity of the 2 - 3 ds ld bacterial

cultures was checked by eye in the dark rwm for up to 5 min.

Page 174: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

equal. The number of Vsm cells increased dramatically from 4 x IO7 CFUIg wet insect

tissue at 24 h to 4 x 10' cells to 5 x 10' cells / g wet insect tissue at 2 d, but the number of

Vp cells decreased sharply from 4 x IO9 to 5 x IO9 C N l g wet insect tissue to 3 x 1O8 to 9

x 1P C m / g wet insect tissue in the same period of time. The Vsm count increased

gradually and reached a high level of 9 x 10' CFUl g wet insect tissue at day 5, while the

Vp count remained at a lower level during the period 2 - 3 d post infection before re-

gaining a high population of 4 x IO9 to 5 x IO9 C N I g wet insect tissue at 5 d after

infection. The population of Vsm in the larvae declined gradually after day 5, but the Vp

population remained relatively constant through to day 21 or day 25 postinfection before

decnasing rapidly thereafter. Bacterial contaminants, probably from the insect's

alimentary system or body surface of the insect. were readily detected during the fint 12

h, but their number decreased rapidly during the fint 24 h after infection, and few of them

could be detected thereafter. No Vp or Vsm was detected in the control insect larvae, but

bacterial contaminants were detected.

The resulu were confimed in a repeat expriment (Fig. 19).

C. Development of Heterorhabditis sp. HMD inside the cadavers

The symbiotic nernatoàe completed its life cycle about 9 d after infection of G.

mellonella larvae and produced new Us. Population peaks of hermaphroditic femaie,

amphimictic femde, and new Ils occumd at about 2,5 and 9 d, respectively.

D. pH change of the nematode-infected insect cadavers

The pH of the macesated G. mellonello caâavers dropped first from 7.05 at O h to

Page 175: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

6.9 at 12 h after infection, and then increased gradually to a peak level at about 7.3 at 2 -

3 d postinfection. It then decreased gradually thereafter until27 d (Fig. 19).

6.3.6 In vivo production of ST by different Photorhabdus spp.

ST was produced in G. mellonella cadavers infected by al1 the nematode -

bacterial complexes tested by 7 d after nematode infection, but the quantity of ST varied

with bacterial species/isolate (Table 23). Greater arnount of ST was produced by H.

megidis 90 - P. luminescens C9 complex and H. murelatus - Photorhabdus sp. complex

than did by other complexes (P < 0.05). The H. bacteriophora Oswego - Photorhabdus

sp. Oswego pmduced the least amount of ST (655.2 pglg wet insect) and the H.

muretatus - Photorhabdirr sp. complex produced the greatest quantity of ST

(4182.1 pglg).

6.4 Discussion

Although antibiotic production in entomopathogenic nematode-infected insects

was noted as early as 1959 by Dutky (1959), and seved classes of antibiotics have since

k e n identified from in vitro cultures of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. (Li et

al., 1998), ]iule is knom about the qualitative and quantitative production of the

antibiotics inside the insect cadaver (Maxwell et al., 1994; Jarosz, 1996).

The nsults of the pnscnt study showed that ST, which is both an antibiotic (Paul

et al., 1981; Li et al.. 1995b) and a nematicide, was produced in nematode-infected G.

Page 176: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Tabk 23. Concentration of 3$-dihydmxy4-isopmpylstilbene (ST) produeed by

Hetetorhcrbdüis spp. - Photorhabdus spp. complexes in larval caàavers of GuIleriu

mellonella at 7 d postinfeetion

Complex ST (pgg wet insect)

H. bacteriophora Oswego - PhotorhaMus sp. Oswego 665.2 f 15 1 .Sc

H. murelatus - Photorhabdus sp. 4182.1 f 241.la

H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens C9 3729.4 f 2 14.4a

H. rnegidis 90 - P. luminescens Cg* 3857.3 f 176.9a

Heterorhabditis sp. HMD - P. luminescens MD 1697.2 k 83.0b

Heterorhabditis sp. Spain - Photorhabdus sp. Spain 153 1.7 f 1 56.2bc

Data are expressed as mean f SE (n=3). Means followed by the same letter are not

significantly diffennt (P c 0.05).

*: Repeated expenment.

Page 177: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

mellonella cadavers in a much greater quantity and over a much longer period

postinfection compared with that produced in broth cultures (Table 23; Figs. 17 and 19).

However, another nematicidal compound, indole, which was identified from in vitro

cultures, was not detectable in any of the nematode-infected G. mellonella cadavers using

the TLC-UV methods. The injection of P. luminescens MD alone into larval G.

mellonella demonstrated that the absence of indole was not related to the presence or

absence of the nematode symbionts. As well, it was shown that the bacteria used for

injection and those re-isolated from injected larval cadavers were capable of producing

indole in TSB medium. The reason for the absence. or perhaps an undetectable level, of

indole under in vivo conditions is not clear. It is possible that the apparent lack of indole

in the larval cadavers was due to environmental factors, rather than to the bacteriurn

itself. Since indole is believed to be produced by microorganisms via tryptophan (Holding

and Collee, 1971 ; Freeman, 1985), the absence of indole may be due to the limited

quantity of tryptophan andfor the physiochemical conditions prevailing inside the

cadavers, or due partially to the TU=-UV methods for indole detection. It is known that

indole has two peaks of maximum W absorbance at 219 and 271 nm (Fig. 6). The

sensitivity of indole detection on TLC plates (or HPLC) would be increased by using a

W lamp with a wavelength of either 219 or 271 nm. The absence, or perhaps much

lower level, of indole is not surprising because indole is toxic to entomopathogenic

nematodes at higher concentrations (Figs. 12 and 13), and the data presented here show

that there wcre many developing nematodes in the infected cadavers.

ST was produced in infected insect Ianrae 24 h postinfection, which was when the

in- larvae were dying, and maintained a relatively high and constant level throughout

Page 178: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

the infection cycle. That is, al1 developmental stages of the nematode symbiont were

virnially immersed in the nutrient environment with its high concentrations of ST. The

concentration of ST in nematode-infected larval G. mellonella was more than 1,000 pg/g

wet insect by 48 h infection (Figs. 17 and 19), which is many times greater then that

needed to inhibit the growth of several soil microorganisms under in vitro conditions (Li

et al., 1995b). The early production of ST may ôe triggered by bacterial contarninants

nleased from the rupnired alimentary system of the larvae due to the nematodes' andor

bacterial activity, and this production helps to maintain a suitable environment with

minimum cornpetition for the development of the nematode and bacterial symbionts.

Since ST is nematicidal, it dso might kill the bacterial-feeding nematodes that live in the

surrounding soil and that potentially could consume bacterial cells associated with the

insect cadaver.

The bacterial growth appears to be closely related to the development of the

nematode symbionts inside the cadavers, because peok population levels of the bacteria in

both H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens C9 and Heterorhabditis sp. HMD - P. luminescens

MD complexes appeared at about the same time that large numbea of amphimictic

female nematades were developing. Both bacterial species built up high population levels

(-IO9 CFü/ g wet insect tissue) inside the infccted larvae within 24 h of infection. The

increasing levels of the bacteria were accompanied by rapidly decreasing levels of the

bacterial contaminants. The rarely deteciable bacterial contarninants after 24 h maybe

due partially to the early production of ST. The population level of P. luminescens MD

primary fom cells, Vp, decrcaîed sharply by 48 h of infection. This sharp decnase of the

Vp ce11 level at 48 h of infection may perhaps be due to the increasing numbcr of Vsrn

Page 179: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

cells that were competing for nutrients or the effect of Vsrn metabolites. The decreased

number of Vp cells at this stage of the infection might be beneficial to the nematode

symbionts, because then were only a few hermaphroditic females at this stage and more

food or food nserves could be used in the subsequent development and reproduction of

the large number of amphimictic females. In fact, the Vp cells regained high population

levels within the insect cadaver when there were huncûeds of amphimictic females and

males at 5 d after infection. Vsrn was rarely detectable in the cadavea after about 17 d of

infection presumably because the population of Vsrn was very low at the late stage of the

infection. In plate cultures, Vp and Vsrn were readily interchangable. However, it is not

clear whether the growth patterns of Vp and Vsrn in nematode-infected larval cadavers

are due to the relatively independent growth of these two forrns or to the interchange of

one form with another over the period of infection.

Polymorphism appears to be a cornmon property of Xenorhabdus spp. and

Photorhnbdus spp. in both the colonial and cellular levels of in vitro cultures (Akhurst,

1980; Boemare and Akhurst, 1988; Hurlben et al., 1989; Gemtsen et al., 1992). Its

significance is unknown, although there is speculation that both the secondary form

(phase ïI) and the small-colony variants may have a survival advantage for the species

(Hurlben et al., 1989; Gerritsen et al., 1992). Such cells do not produce secondary

metabolites, and so more energy could be diverted to ce11 division and growth (Gemtsen

et al., 1992; Smigielski et al., 1994). The pnsent study found chat a smalltolony variant,

Vsm, which is an intermediate type between the primary and secondary foms of the

bactecium occurred in both in vitro and, in particular, in vivo conditions (Table 22; Fig.

19). The prirnary form (Vp) and the Vsrn co-exist in infsted iasects and show very

Page 180: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

different population dynamics. Nso, Vsm was demonstrated to be less prefemd by, and

less pathogenic to its nematode symbionts (data not shown). The question arises as to

why the Vsm variant should occw so early in the development of the nematode and be so

abundant in a newly-infected insect cadaver when, presumably the nutrient level is high.

Gemtsen et aL(1992) proposed that the nematode might prefer the primary form over the

smalltolony variants and so the presence of the small-colony variants might prevent the

nematode from nmoving al1 the bacterial cells in the cadaver during feeding. However,

almost al1 observations on colony variant were made under in vitro conditions, and

species/isolates of Photorhabdus, except for P. luminescens MD, are not known to have

colony variants under in vivo conditions. More strains and species of Xenorhabdus and

Photorhabdus should be studied under in vivo conditions in order to have a more

complete understanding of the biological roles of the small-colony variants and the

secondary fonn in the nematode-bacterium-insect association.

Unlike in vitro culture in TSB medium when the pH could be as high as 9.0, the

pH of macerated, nematode-infected G. mellonella was much lower king nearly neutrai

(-6.85 - 7.6) during the entire infection process (Figs. 17c and 19c). The difference

indicates a quantitative andor qualitative ciifference of the alkaline metabolites between

those under in vitro and those under in vivo conditions. Since extreme pH in the

environment is likely to be hannful to the entomopathogenic nematode, the results

suggest that it may be beneficid when mus-culhiring nematodes to control the pH

conditions in order to optimize nematode production.

Maxwell et al. (1994) reported that antibiotic metabolites released from

nematode-infected G. mellonella larval cadavers into the sumunding soi1 could

Page 181: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

temporarily decrease the population levels of some soil bacteria. ST was produced in

larval cadavers at relatively high concentrations by al1 strains and species of

Photorhabdus studied (Table 23). The toxic effect of ST against hingal-feeding

nematodes or bacterial-feeding nematodes, such as C. eleganr, and its strong repelling

activity against Us of several Steinemema spp., but not those of Heterorhbditis spp.

tested (Table 19; Fig. 12), suggest that ST might not only help to maintain optimal

environmental conditions as an antibiotic inside the insect cadaver for the development of

the bacterium and its nematode symbiont, but might also play a role in decreasing

cornpetition for resources and habitat by imrnobilizing, killing or repelling other

nematode species within or outside the cadavers. The strong, nematode-repelling property

of ST also may be an advantage for Heterorhabditis spp., when it is nleased into the

surrounding soil during U emergence where it cm serve to repel cornpetitors from the

immediate foraging area while searching for a new host. Interestingly, in this regard, the

Us of S. glasen' and S. feltiae, two known cruiser foragers, were arnong the most sensitive

ones to ST in these experiments but S. carpocapsae, an arnbusher forager, was not

effected by ST (Table 19).

The finding in this study of a difference between in vitro and in vivo metabolitic

production has led to a separate research project in which two novel pigments (Hu et al.,

1998) and a novel antibiotic (Hu et al., unpubl.) were identified from P. luminescens Cg-

infected G. mellonellu cadaver extracts. As well, it was found in the present study that

there was distinct qualitative and quantitative difference in in vivo met abolites produced

by P. luminescens C9 following infection of lmal G. mellonellu, especially during the

f i t few days after infection (Fig. 18). Furtber study of these differences may help to

Page 182: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

understand the metabolic process of the bacteria and the biological role of the

metabolites.

In conclusion, ST, but not indole, was identified from nematode-infected larvd

cadavers of G. rnellonella. ST was produceci in the cadavea by al1 the Photorhabdus spp.

tested but in variable quantities. In larval G. mellonella, infected by either H. megidis 90

or Heterorhabditis sp. HMD, ST was not detectable within the first 24 h of infection but

increased rapidly by 48 h to 5 d postinfection and remained ai a relatively high and

constant level even after the nematode symbiont had completed its reproduction. The

population dynamics of the bacteria under in vivo conditions were highly variable

depending on the bacterial isolates tested. However, bacterial growth appears to be related

to the development of the nematode symbionts in nematode-infected G. mellonella l w a e

in that the peak levels of the primary cells of the bactena and of arnphimictic fernales

occur simultaneously in both H. megidis 90 - P. luminescens and in Heterorhabditis sp

HMD - P. luminescens MD complexes. In nematode-infected l m a e pH of the macerated

larvae wen slightly higher than 7.0. The earl y production as well as the higher quantity of

ST, which has both antibiotic and nematicidal propcrties, suggests that it plays a

signifcant role in the symbiotic association between the nematodes and their respective

bacterial symbionts.

Page 183: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

CHAITER 7

GENERAL DISCUSSlON

Entomopathogenic nematodes. Steinememo spp. and Heterorhabditis spp., and

their respective bacterial symbionts, Xenorhabdur spp. and Photorhabdu spp.. fom a

tripartite nematode-bacterium-insect association once the insect host is infected. The

symbiotic bacteria produce antimicrobial and insecticidal metabolites in broth culture.

These bioactive agents are generally believed to play an important role in this tripartite

association, such as in preventing competition from bacterial contarninants and in

weakening the defense response of the insect host (Dutky, 1959; Paul et al., 1981;

Mchemey et al., 1991a; Akhurst and Dunphy, 1993). The present study has demonstrated

that the bacterial symbionts also produce nematicidai metabolites under both in vitro and

in vivo conditions. This discovery provides new evidence on the important role of the

bacterial secondary metabolites in the nematode-bacterium-insect associations.

Unlike the insecticidal activity of the bacterial metabolites, which help to kill the

insect host (Ensign et al., 1990; Bowen et al., 1998). the role of the nematicidal and

antimicrobial substances appears to be to help minimize competition from other species

of nematodes and bacteria. This is in addition to the bacteria's mle in developing and

maintaining optimal growth conditions for the bacterial and nematode symbionts within

the insect cadavers. Together, the nematicidal, insecticidal and antimicrobial activities

represent three major biological contributions of the bacteria to the symbiotic

relationship with tôe entomopathogenic nematodes and to their mutual success in theK

tripartite association with the insect boa.

Page 184: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

In the present study, three nematicidal metabolites, ammonia, 3,5-dihydroxy4-

isopropylstilbene and indole have been identified from cultures of Xenorhabdus spp.

andlor Photorhabdus spp.. Two important plant-parasitic nematodes, M. incognita and B.

xylophilus, were selected as the target nematodes in the routine bioassays. This selection

was based mainly on (i) the fact that M. incognita and B. xylophilw are representatives of

two distinctive nematode taxa, the Tylenchina and Aphelenchina; (ii) both nematode

species are commercially. very important worldwide pests in agriculture and forestry,

reyxtively (Sasser and Carter, 198s; Mamiya, 1984; Sutherland and Webster, 1993);

(iii) an inhibitory effect of the entomopathogenic nematode-bacterium complexes on

Meloidogyne spp. and other plant-parasitic nematodes has been reported (Bird and Bird,

1986; Ishibashi and Kondo, 1986; Georgis and Kelly, 1997), and (iv) a large quantity of

12s of M. incognita and J4s and adults of B. xylophilw were readily available in the

laboratory. In the present study, the occurrence of ST would properly have been rnissed if

only M. incognita had been used during the screening process, because J2s of M.

incognita are not affected by ST even at 200 pglml. Also. M. incognita is more sensitive

to solvents than is B. xylophilus. Consequently, the quantity of the solvents used in the

bioassay and, subsequently, the concentration of the crude, organic compounds screened

would have to be decreased. In other words, the sensitivity of the nematicidal bioassays

would be significantly decreased if only M. incognita had been used. It has ken ~po r t ed

that a significant factor in any nematicidal screening system is the choice of the bioassay

species, because the sensitivity of difîerent nematode species to test materials may Vary

significantly (Anke and Sterner. 1997). For example, the nematicidai compounds that

were pmduced by fungal cultures, such as ascomycetes and nematophagous fun@, and

Page 185: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

detected by a bioassay using the free-living nematodes, Panagrellus redivivus, Rhabditis

spp. or C. elegans, were found not to be active against M. incognita (Anke and Sterner,

1997). The results of the present snidy emphasize the importance of selecting an

appropriate range of organisms for an effective bioassay.

Of the t h e nematicidal metabolites identified, ST and indole have not been

reported previously to ôe nematicidal. In the present study, both ST and indole &ected

egg hatch, and the viability, mobility and dispcrsal behaviour of a variety of nematode

species. Indole caused paralysis of nematodes at lower concentrations and was lethal to

al1 nematode species tested at relatively high concentrations in immersion tests. ST, on

the other hand, was active against bacterial-feeding nematodes, such as C. eleguns, and

fungal-feeding nematodes, such as Bursaphelenchus spp. and A. rhytium but not against

12s of M. incognita or Us of H. megidis 90. The differential nematicidal effect of ST is

important in the in vivo interaction between the bacterium and the nematode symbiont,

because it was shown in the present study that ail developmental stages of

Heterorhabditis spp. were immersed in relatively high concentrations (-600 - 4,000 pg/g

insect) of ST within the insect cadaver.

It was shown in the present study that culture filtrates of most bacteria were active

against J2s of M. Acognita, even the filtrates were diluted to 1/4 of the original strength.

Given the activities of the nematicidal metabolites identified from the filtrates and their in

vitro production, the nematicidal activity of the filtrates was apparcntly a combined effect

of nematicidal agents, including unidentified ones. Together, the identification of

ammonia ST and indole expands on and confirms the conclusion reached (Chapter 3)

Page 186: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

that multiple factors involved and contributed to the total nematicidai activity detected in

the culture filtrates of Xenorhabdus spp and Photorhabdus spp.

It is a practical approach to screen the derivatives of a known bioactive compound

to find more active ones, and such a screening may sometimes result in more promising

agrochernicals and dmgs than the compound initially identified (Betina, 1994; Suga,

1994). ST and indole themselves oKer no potentiai application as demonstrated in the

present study. Firstly, ST was not active against M. incognita, one of the most

econornically important plant-parasitic nematode pests worldwide. Secondly, although ST

was active against Bursaphelenchus spp., its activity was lower compared with that of

certain stilbene derivatives reported by Suga (1994). Thirdly, indole is active against egg

hatch and JZs of M. incognitu, but it failed to pnvent infection of the nematode in

greenhouse tests. However, indole derivatives might be more effective. Since indole is

more active against M. incognita in vitro, several simple indole derivatives were tested

for their nematicidal activity. A few of them were more active than indole and their

activity is closely related with the type and position of the hinctional group(s) on the

indole skeleton. ST, a stilbene denvative, was not explond further, kcause dozens of

synthesized stilbcne derivatives had been studied or patented after identifying the

nematicidal property of a few natural occumng stilbene derivatives (Moharnmad et al.,

1992; Suga et al., 1993; Suga, 1994). The unidentified nematicidal metabolite(s) from

Xenorhobdus spp., especially X. nemtophilus BCI (Chapter 4). repnsents another kind

of nematicide(s) that is different fiom ST and indole, and remains to be identified and its

potential to be exploreci.

Page 187: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Large numbers of Us of entomopathogenic nematodes are required for the

successful control of insect pests in the field. Miller and Bedding (1982) showed that

about 6000 million S. feltiae (=Neoaplectuna bibionis) per hectare would be required to

effectively control stem borer, Synanthedon tipulifonnis, on black currants in the field,

and similar numbers per hectare of H. heliothidis (= H. bacteriophora) for black vine

weevil control on strawberry (Bedding, 1984). Consequently, the nematodes must be

mass-produced in very large numbers, at low cost and have a reasonable shelf life. The

present study showed that ammonia which is nematicidal, is commonly produced in in

vitro cultures of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. This suggests that improved

media formulation andlor cultural conditions that decrease the quantity of ammonia,

indole and other nematicidal metabolites, which are toxic also to entomopathogenic

nematodes, could enhance the eficacy of in vitro nematode production for these

commercial applications.

The possible production of nematode toxic metabolites by the secondary form of

the bacterial symbionts nmains unclear. Secondary forms of Xenorhabdus spp. and

PhotorhabduF spp. differ from the primary foms of the bacteria in several characteristics

(Akhurst, 1980). When both the pnmary and secondary forms are available as food

sources, the nematode symbionts prefer feeding on the pnmary rather than the secondary

fom (Gemtsen and Smits, 1997). In fact, the secondary form does not support the growth

and reproduction of the nematode symbionts as well as does the primary form (Akhurst,

1980; Aldiurst and Boemare, 1990; Gemtsen and Smits, 1997). Ehlers et al. (1990)

suggested that the secondary fom of P. luminescens produced a toxin that kills the

nematode symbionts. They found a negative effect of secondary form of P. luminescens

Page 188: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

spp. on Heterorhabditis spp., but secondary form of Xenorhabdus spp. had no effect on

Steinemema spp. Later, Akhurst (1993) and Gemtsen and Smits (1997) considered that

the resuits were more likely nutrient reiated rather than the results of production of a

toxin. Further study on the possible production of nematode toxic metabolites by

secondary foms of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. is necessary, because it

might help explain more hlly the specific symbiotic association between the bacteria and

nematodes and help improve the in vitro production of the entomopathogenic nernatodes.

Metabolites of Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. influence the nematode

symbionts in several ways. Grewal et al. (1997) suggested that symbiotic bacteria inside

the nematode-infected host are a source of volatile, infochemicals, which play an

important role in inter- and intra-specific nematode competition. The authors

hypothesized that Us may reduce competition by responding differently to the cues from

unparasitized hosts vs hosts parasitized by conspecific or heterospecific nematodes.

Glazer (1997) nported that the initial infection of an insect host by entomopathogenic

nernatodes induced the release of a substance that reduced the subsequent nematode

invasion and that such a decrease is nematode species specific. As well, Ehlers and

Iohnigk (1998) reported that the symbiotic bacteria excrete a signal which may change

the developmental pathway of the first stage juveniles. The nature of this signal is not

known yet.

One of the significant discoveries of the present study was that the nematicidal

metabdites prduced by Xenorhabdur spp. andlor Photorhabdus spp. dso infiuence the

behaviour of theK respective nematode symbionts. Interactions between Steinememu

spp., Heterorhabditis spp. and other nematode species have been reported (Bird & Bird,

Page 189: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

1986; Ishibashi & Kondo, 1986; Robinson, 1995; Koppenhofer et al., 1996; Kaya &

Koppenhofer. 1996). However, the effect of metabolites from the bacterial symbionts

within the insect cadavers or when released into the surounding soil dunng U emergence,

previously has not k e n considered. ST was prduced in larval cadavers at relatively high

concentrations by dl strains and species of Photorhabdus studied (Figs. 16 and 18; Table

24). The toxic effect of ST against tùngal-feeding nematodes or bacterial feeding

nemntodes, such as C. eleguns, and its strong repelling activity against Us of several

Steinemema spp., but not those of the Heterorhabditis spp. tested, suggests that ST might

play a role in decreasing cornpetition for resources and habitat by immobilizing, killing or

repelling other nematode species within or outside the cadavers. In the soil, the bacterial

and nematode syrnbionts and the insect cadaver in the tripartite association may face

predation either individually or in total. Saprophytic nematodes are cornmon in the

midgut of insects and would if not controlled, continue to feed and reproduce on the

microflora of the Heterorhabditis infected cadavers. Some bacterial-feeding and

nematode-feeding mmatodes in the soil may be attmcted towards and feed on this

bbcontainer" of the bacteria and nematodes, the nematode-infected insect cadaver. ST may

help prevent such predation. The behaviour-influencing metabolites, including ST, may

dso play a role in intra- or inter-specific interaction between entomopathogenic

nematodes (Glazer, 1997; Grewai et al., 1997). The strong nematode-repelling property

of ST may be advantageous for Heterorhabditis spp., when it is released into the

surrounding soil d u h g D emergence where it could repel cornpetitors and protect the

nematode's habitulspace.

Page 190: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

The inhibitory effect of the entomopathogenic nematode - bacterium complexes

on other nematode species has been noted in vivo (Bird and Bird, 1986; Ishibashi and

Kondo, 1986) and in the field (Georgis and Kelly, 1997). Consequently, the potential has

been considered for controlling plant-parasitic nematodes while applying

entomopathogenic nematodes against insect pests. The mechanism of action of the

inhibitory effect on plant-parasitic nematodes is not clear. Georgis and Kelly (1997)

suggested three possible mechanisrns that may be involved. Firstly. competition for space

and habitat between entomopathogenic nematodes and other nematode species. Secondly,

inundative application rnay enhance the predator-prey response in the field, since many

nematode-feeding organisms, such as protozoa, nematodes and fungi may consume

indiscriminately both entomopathogenic and plant-parasitic nematodes. Thirdly, bacterial

metabolites released into the surrounding soil from insect cadavers infected by

entomopathogenic nematode may adversely affect plant-parasitic nematodes and decrease

their populations.

The present study provides evidence to help clarify and stimulate further

speculation. The nematicidal metabolite, ST, is active against bacterial- and fungal-

feeding nematodes and is present in the nematode-infected larvai G. mellonella cadavers

at high concentrations throughout the life cycle of the nematodes. Maxwell et al. (1994)

reported that antimicrobial metabolites released from steinemernatid-infected larval G.

mellonella cadavers during Us emergence temporarily decreased population levels of soil

bacteria. The natural release of the contents of the cadavers during U emergence was

repeatedly confirmed in the present study. The nddish brown materials from the

heterorhabditid-infectecl cadaven stained the white filter paper in the Petri dishes during

Page 191: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Us emergence. As a result, the nematicidal metabolites released from the cadavers into

the surrounding soil may partially contribute to the observed inhibitory effect on soil

nematodes after inundative application of entomopathogenic nematodes. However, the

mrnaticidal effect alone appears to be limited in space and time compared with the

overall nematode inhibitory effect observed in the field, because the metabolites released

do not persist or spread widely because of biotic and/or non-biotic factors. Another factor

involved is the density of soil insects that are susceptible to these entomopathogenic

nematodes. If there are few of these insects, the density of cadavers infected by the

nematodes in the soil will be low and, subsequently, the quantity of antibiotic and

nematicidal compounds released into the soil will be relatively small. Ishibashi and

Kondo (1986) reported that application of the entomopathogenic nematodes inhibited the

populations of soil nematodes in potted soil and bark compost. It seems unlikely there

were many insect hosts in potted soil or bark compost and thus then would not be enough

nematicidal metabolites released from the cadaver. Consequently, the inhibited nematode

population in this particular case might be attributcd mainly to some other factors such as

enhanced prey-predator effect a d o r cornpetition for space.

Although it was proposed decades ago (Dutky, 1959) that the production of

antirnimbial substances in nematode-infected insects prevented putrefaction of the

cadavers, M e in vivo experimental data is available to support that speculation (Maxwell

et al., 1994; Jarosz, 1996). RecenUy, the hypothesis was questioned by Jarosz (1996). He

reported that a low antibiotic potency of a lirnited spectrum of antibacterial activity was

found during al1 the developmental stages of the nematode in G. mellunella infected with

S. carpocapsae or H. bacteriophora. Consequently, the author proposed that the lack of

Page 192: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

putrefaction of the infected insect was rather a result of littie or no cornpetition for the

Xenorhabdus dunng rapid colonization of the insect body and this rapid growth prevented

secondary invasion of the insect cadaver.

In contrast to the results reported by Iarosz (1996), the pnsent study provides

new, chernical evidence of antibiotic production within nematode-infected insects and

supports the hypothesis of antibiotic inhibition (Dutky, 1959) at least in the

Heterorhabditis spp. - Photorhabdus spp.0 G. mellonella ttipartitate association. Firstly,

the nematicidal metabolite ST, which is dso an antibiotic (Paul et al., 1981; Li et al.,

1995b), was proven chemically to be produced by al1 five Heterorhabditis -

Photurhabduï complexes tested in l a r d G. mellonella cadavers, and at 7 d postinfection

it had a concentration of 665 - 4,182 pg/g wet insect (Table 24; Figs. 16 and 18). In Iarval

G. mellonella infected by either H. megidis 90 or Heterorhabditis sp. HMD. ST was

detectable after 24 h infection and maintained a relatively high concentration (-3,700

pg/g and 1,700 pglg wet insect respectively) throughout the Iife cycle of the nematode

symbiont within the cadavers (Figs. 16 and 18). These concentrations of ST are much

higher compared with those produced in broth cultures (Fig. 8) and are ten to hundnds of

times higher than the concentration necessary to inhibit most test microorganisms under

in vitro conditions (Li et al., 199%; Li et al., 1998). Secondly, it was repotted (Hu et al.,

1998) that a variety of anthraquinone derivatives besides ST and AT were pduced in

larval cadavers of G. mellonella infected by H. mgidis W. Some of the anthraquinone

derivatives have been shown to be antibacterial (Sztacicskai et al., 1992; Li et al., 199%).

Similar anthraquinone derivatives were dso produced by d l five Heterorhabditis spp. - Photorhabdus spp. complexes studied (see Chapter 6) in larval G. niellonellu cadavers.

Page 193: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Thirdly, Maxwell et al. (1994) reported that the antibiotic activity was detected after

demise of the insect whether infected by the nematode-bacterium complex or the bacterial

symbiont alone. The known antibiotics, xenocoumacins 1 and 2, were reported to be

produced at a 1:l ratio in larval G. mellonella infected by X. nematophilus subsp. dutki

(isolates GI and WU), and the total concentration of xenocoumacins 1 and 2 was 800

no00 mg (wet weight) of insect tissue for the GI isolate. Maxwell et al. (1994) noted

also that the levels of antibiotic activity was greater in extracts from nematode-infected

G. mellonella than in TSB broth. These results support Our observation that greater

amount of antibiotics were produced in vivo than in in vitro. Fourthly, the experimental

design and subsequent conclusion by Jarosz (1996) might be controversial. For example,

only aqueous extracts of the nematode-infected insects were tested. The results therefore

may be misleading, because dl known antibiotics produced in vitro by Xenorhabdus spp.

or Photorhubdus spp., such as indole denvatives, xenorhabdins, xenorxides, stilbene

derivatives, anthraquinone derivatives, nematophin (Table 3; Li et al., 1998) and two

novel abtibiotics (Ap and a furan derivative) (Hu et al., unpubl.) are soluble in organic

solvents. Only the xenocoumacins are water soluble (McInerney et al., 199 1 b). In fact, the

present study showed that ST, in addition to anthraquinone derivatives, was produced

(665.2 i 151.5 pg/g wet insect) in G. mellonella infected by H. bacteriophoru Oswego,

the same nematode species used by Jarosz (1996), and both ST and anthraquinone

derivatives would not be dissolved in the aqueous extract of the insect. Finally, it was

shown in the present study that a rapid and massive multiplication of the syrnbiotic

bacteria occumd in the nematode-infected larval G. mellonella within 24 h of infection

(Figs. 16 anci le), but antibiotics were s a 1 produced by the symbiotic bacteria &ter 24 h

Page 194: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

of infection when the insect host was dying. The timing of antibiotic production appears

to be comlated with the mpture of the alimentary system of the host insect after

nematode infection. During the first few hours post nematode penetration of the host, the

non-symbiotic bacteria carried on the body surface of the nematodes are eliminated by the

insect's immune system, but the symbiotic bacteria are somewhat resistant to the insect's

immune system or are not recognized as nonself (Dunphy and Webster, 1988; Dunphy

and Thurston, 1990). Consequently, these symbionts multiply rapidly and begin to build

up high population levels (Figs. 16 and 18) within the fint 24 h of infection and, as a

result of the activity of the bacteria and its nematode syrnbiont. the insect host dies and its

tissues, including the p i , break down. This rupture of the host's digestive tract leads to

the release of bacterial contaminants into the hemocoel, which threatens the growth

conditions for the bacteria and the nematode syrnbiont inside the cadavers. However, the

production of the antibiotics, perhaps including bactenocins, by the symbiotic bacteria at

this stage diminishes such a risk. More in vivo studies, especially for the Steinetnema -

Xenorhabdus - insect host association, are necessary to clari@ the biological role of the

anti biotics.

in conclusion, this study has opened the gate to a new research area in the

tripartite association. The study has demonstrated for the first time the nematicidal

properties of Xenorhnbdus spp and Photorhabdus spp. Three nematicidal metabolites,

ammonia, 3,s-dihydroxyl4isopcopylstilbene and indole, were identified in broth cultures

and 3,5-dihydroxyl4isopropylsti1bene was shown to be aiso prduced by P. luminescens

at high levels in vivo. The nematicidal metabolites not only affect the viability, mobility

and egg hatch of a variety of nematode species but also Us' behaviour of

Page 195: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

entomopathogenic nematodes, Steinemena spp. and Heterorhabditis spp. The study

provided evidence of the importance of the bacterial metabolites including antibiotics in

the tripartite association. However, many aspects of the role of these bacterial metabolites

in the nematode-bacterium-insect association are still to be revealed. For example, what is

the chernical nature of the unidentified, nematicidal metabolites produced by

Xenorhubdus spp. in culture in the present study? Do the secondary foms of

Xenorhubdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. produce toxic metaboli tes that contribute

partially to the poor nematode production in vitro? Further studies on these topics would

help us undentand more completely these syrnbiotic associations and the biological roles

of the antibiotics and nematicidal metabolites in the tripartite interactions. Such

information would further enhance these nematodes as powerfd biological contro l agents

of insect pests and provide leading bioactive compounds for development of

agriculturally and medically important chemicals.

Page 196: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Aguillera. M. M. and Smart, G. C. Jr. 1993. Development, reproduction, and pathogenicity of Steinemema scapteriso in monoxenic culture with different species of bacteria Journal of Invertebrute Pathology 62: 289-294.

Aguillera, M. M., Hodge, N. C., Stall, R. E. and Smart, G. C. Jr. 1993. Bacterial symbionts of Steinernemu scupterisci. Journal ofInvertebrute Pathology 62: 68-72.

Akhunt, R. J. 1980. Morphological and functional domorphism in Xenorhabdus spp., bacteria symbiotically associated with the insect pathogenic nematodes Neoaplectana and Heterorhabditis. Journal of General Microbiology 12 1 : 303-309.

Akhurst, R, J. 1982. Antibiotic activity of Xenorhabdus spp., bactetia symbiotically associated with insect pathogenic nematodes of the families Heterorhabditidae and Steinemematidae. Journal of General Microbiology 128: 306 1-3065.

Akhurst, R. J. 1983. Neoaplectana species: specificity of association with bacteria of the genus Xenorhabdus. Experimental Parasitology 55: 258-263.

Akhuat, R. J. 1986. Xenorhabdus poinarii: its interaction with insect pathogenic nematodes. Systematic and Applied Microbiology 8: 142- 147.

Akhurst, R J. 1993. Bacterial spbionts of entomopathogenic nematodes - the power behind the throne. In Bedding, R., Akhurst, R. and Kaya, H. (Eds). Nematodes and the biological control cf insect pests. CSIRO Publications, Melbourne. pp. 127- 136.

Akhurst, R. J. and Boemare, N. E. 1986. A non-luminescent strain of Xenorhabdus luminescens. Joumal of General Mirrobiology 132: 19 17- 1922.

Akhurst, R. J. and Boemare, N. E. 1988. A numerical taxonomic study of the genus Xenorhabdus (Enterobacteriaceae) and proposed elevation of the subspecies of X. nematophilus to species. Journal of General Microbiology 134: 1835-1 845.

Akhurst, R. I. and Boemare, N. E. 1990. Biology and taxonomy of Xenorhobdus. fn Gaugler, R. and Kaya, H. K. (Eds). Entomopathogenic nematodes in biological contrd. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Ha. pp. 75-90.

Akhurst, R. I. and Dunphy, G. B. 1993. Tripartite interactions between symbiotically associated entomopathogenic bacteria, nematodes, and their insect hosts. In Beckage, N. E., Thompson, S. N. and Federici, B. (Eds). Parasites a d pathogens of insects. Vol. 2. Academic Press, Inc., New York. pp. 1-23.

Page 197: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Akhurst, R. J., Court, L and Smigielski, A. 1998. New Photorhabdus luminescens isolations from human clinical samples. In: VIIth International Colloquium on Invertebrate Pathology and Microbial Control, Sappora, Japan. p. 72 (Abstr.).

Akhurst, R. J., Srnigielski, A. J., Mari, J., Boemare, N. E. and Mourant, R. G. 1992. Restraction analysis of phase variation in Xenorhabdus spp. (Enterobacteriaceae), entomopathogenic bacteria associated with nematodes. Systematic and Applied Microbiology 1 5: 469-47 3.

Alatorre-Rosas, R. and Kaya, H. K. 199 1. Interaction bctween two entornopathogenic nematode species in the same host. Journal of Invertebrate Pathology 57: 16.

Anderson, J. F. 1987. Composition of the floral odor of Cucurbita maxima Duchesne (Cucurbitaceae). Joumal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 35: 60-62.

Anke. H. and Stemer, 0. 1997. Nematicidal metabolites from high fungi. Current Organic Chemistry 1 : 36 1-374.

Artyukhovsky, , A. K. 1967. Neoaplectana arenaria nov. sp. (Steinemematidae, Nematoda) inducing nematode disease in chalers of the Vomnezh region. Tncdy Voroneszhsbgo Gosudarstvennogo Zapovednika 1 5: 94- 100.

Atta-ur-Rahman, A. M. K., Shabbir, M., Abid, M., Chaudhary, M. I., Nasreen, A., Maqbool, M. A., Shameel, M. and Sualeh, R. 1997. Nematicidal activity of marine organisms. Pakistan Journal of Nemutology 15: 95- 100.

Baghdiguian, S., Boyer-giglio, M. H., Thaler, J. O., Bonnot, G. and Boemare, N. E. 1 993. Bacteriocinogenesis in cells of Xenurhbdus nemutophilus and Photorhabdur luminescens: Enterobacteriaceae associated with entomopathogenic nematodes. Biology of the Ce11 79: 177- 185.

Banage, W. B. and Visser, S. A. 1965. The effect of some fatty acids and pH on a soi1 nematode. Nematulugicu 1 1 : 255-262.

Bannister, D. W. 1981. bdole. In Mark, H. F., Othmer, D. F., Overberger, C. G., Seaborg, O. T., Grayson, M. and Eckroth. D. (Eds). Kirk-Othmer Encyclopedia of chernical technology (3rd dition). Vol. 13. John Wiley & Sons, New York. pp. 213-222.

Bedding, R. A. 1984. Large sale production, storagc and transport of the insect- parasitic nematodes Neoaplectanu spp. and Heterorhabditis spp. Annals of Applied Biology 104: 1 17- 120.

Betina, V. 1994. Bioactive secondary metabolites of microorganisnrî. Elsevier, New York. 468 pp.

Page 198: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Birch, N. E., Roberston. W. M., Geoghegan, 1. E., Mcgavin, W. J., Alphey, T. J. W., Phillips. M. S., Fellows. L. E., Watson, A. A., Simmonds, M. S. J. and Porter, E. A. 1993. DMDP-a plant-derived sugar analogue with systemic activity against plant parasitic nematodes. Nematologica 39: 52 1-535.

Bird, A. F. and Bird, J. 1986. Observations on the use of insect parasitic nematodes as a means of biological control of mot-hot nematodes. International Journal of Parasitology 16: 51 1-516.

Bishop, D. 1958. A technique for scmning antibiotics against eelworms. Nematufugicu 3: 143-148.

Bleakley, B. and Chen, X. 1999. Survival of insect pathogenic and human clinical isolates of Photorhabdus luminescens in previousl y sterile soil. Canadian Journal of Microbiology 45: 27 3-278.

Boemare, N. E. 1995. Controversiai interpntations on the symbiotic relationships in Steinernemu and Heterorhabditis nematode bacterium complexes. In: nie Second International Symposium on Entomopathogenic Nematodes and Their Symbiotic Bacteria. Honolulu, Hawaii. pp. 14-22.

Boemare, N. E. and Akhurst, R. J. 1988. B iochemical and physiological characterization of colony form variants in Xenorhbdus spp. (Enterobacteriaceae). Joitrnal of General Microbiology 134: 75 1-76 1.

Boemare, N. E., Akhurst, R. J. and Mourant, R. G. 1993a. DNA relatedness between Xenorhbdus spp. (Enterobacteciaceae), symbiotic bacteria of entomopathogenic nematodes, and a proposa1 to transfer X. luminescens to a new genus, Photorhbdus gen. nov. Internationul Journal ofSysrematic Bacteriology 43: 249-255.

Boemm, N. E., Bonifassi, E., Laumond, C. and Luciani, J. 1983. Etudes experimentale de l'action pathogene du nematode Neooplectana carpocapsue Weiser, recherches gnotobiologiquez chez l-insecte Galleria mellonellu L. Agronomie 3: 407- 415.

Boemare, N. E., Boyer-Giglio, M. H., Thaler. J. O., Akhurst R. 1. 1993b. The phages and bacteriocins of Xenorhabdus spp., importance for the specificity of their bacterid host to the nematode Steinemematidae and Heterochabditidae. In Bedding, R., Akhurst, R. and Kaya, H. (Eds). Nemutodes and the biological control of insect pests. CSIRO Publications, Melbourne. pp. 137-146.

Boemare, N., Givaudan, A., Brehelin, M. and Laumond, C. 1997. Syrnbiosis and pathogenicity of nematode-bacterium complexes. Syntbiosis 22: 2 1-45.

Page 199: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Boemare, N. E., Boyer-Giglio, M. H., Thaler, J. O., Akhurst, R. J. and Brehelin, M. 1992. Lysogeny and bacteriocinogeny in Xenorhbdus nematophilus and other Xenorhbdus spp. Applied and Environmental Mkrobiology 58: 3032-3037.

Bovien, P. 1937. Some types of association between nematodes and insects. Videnskabelige Meddelelser Fra Dansk Naturhistorisk Forening 10 1 : 1 - 1 14.

Bowen, D. J. and Ensign, J. C. 1998. Purification and characterizaiion of a high- rnolecular-weight insecticidal protein complex produced by the entomopathogenic bacteriurn Photorhabdus Iwniniescens. Applied and Environmental Micrology 64: 3029-3035.

Bowen, D. J., Rocheleau, T. A., Blackburn, M., Andreev, O., Golubeva, E., Bhartia, R. and Ffrench-Constant, R. H. 1998. Insecticidal toxins from the bacterium Photorhabdiw, luminescens. Sciences 280: 2 129-2 132.

Brehelin, M., Cherqui, A., Drif, L., Luciani, I., Akhurst, R. I. and Boemare, N. E. 1993. ültrastructura.1 study of surface components of Xenorhabdus spp. in different ce11 phases and culture conditions. Journal of invertebrate Pathology 6 1 : 1 88- 19 1.

Buchanan, R. E. and Gibbons, N. E. (Eds). 1974. Bergey 's manual of deteminative bacteriology (8th edition). The Williams and Wilkins Co., Baltimore. 1 268 pp.

Byrd, D. W., Kirkpatrick, T. Jr. and Barker, K. R. 1983. An improved technique for clearing and staining plant tissue for detection of nematodes. Journal of Nematology 15: 142-143.

Cabanillas, H. E., Poinar, G. O. Jr. and Raulston, J. R. 1994. Steinemema riobravis n. sp. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae) from Texas. Fundamental and Applied Nematology 17: 123-131.

Campbell, J. F and Gaugler, R. 1993. Nictation behaviour and its ecological implications in the host sewh strategies of entomopathogenic nematodes (Heterorhabditidae and Steinernematidae). Behaviour 126: 155- 169.

Castro. C. E., McKinney, H. E. and Lux, S. 1991. Plant protection with inorganic ions. Journal of Nemtology 23: 409.413.

Cayrol, JeanClaude, Dijan, C. and Pijarowski, L. 1989. Study of the nematocidal properties of the culture filtrate of the nematophagous hiogus Pïaecilonyces lifacinus. Revue de Nemaîology 12: 33 1-336.

Chen, 0. 19%. Antimicrobial activity of the nematode symbionts, Xenorhbdus and Photorhabdus spp. (Enterobacteriaceae), and the discovery of two groups of antimicrobial

Page 200: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

substances, nematophin and xenontides. PhD. Thesis. Simon Fraser University, Vancouver. pp. 15 1.

Chen, G., Zhang, Y., Dunphy, G. B., Punja, 2. K. and Webster, J. M. 1996. Chitinase ac tivity of Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus species, bacterial associates of entomopathogenic nematodes. Journal of Invertebrate Pathology 68: 10 1 - 106.

Chitwood, D. J. 1993. Naturally occurring nematicides. In Duke, S. O., Menn, J. J. and Plimmer, J. R. (Eds). Pest control with enhanced environmental safety. American Chemical Society, Washington, DC. pp. 300-3 15.

Colepicolo, P., Cho. K. W., Poinar, G. 0. and Hastings, J. W. 1989. Growth and luminescens of the bactenum Xenorhabdus luminescens fiom a human wound. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 55: 260 1-2606.

de Coucet, M. M. A. 1986. A new species of Neouptectana Steiner, 1929 (Nematoda: Steinemematidae) from Cordoba, Argentina. Revue de Nematologie 9: 3 17-323.

de Coucet, M. M. A. and Doucet, M. E. 1990. Steinernema ritteri n. sp. (Nematoda: Steinemematidae) with a key to the species of the genus. Nematologica 36: 257-265.

Couche, G. A. and Gregson, R. P. 1987. Protein inclusions produced by the entomopathogenic bacterium Xenorhabdus nematophilus subsp. nematophilus. Journal of Bacteriology 169: 5279-5288.

Cross, J. V. and Polonenko, D. R. 1996. An industry perspective on registration and commercialization of biocontrol agents in Canada. Canodian Journal of Plant Pathology 1 8: 446-454.

Duke, S. O., Menn, J. J. and Plimmer, J. R. 1993. Challenges of pst control with enhanced toxicological and environmentai safety: An overview. ln Duke, S. O., Menn, J. J. and Plimmer, I. R. (Eds). Pest control with enhanced environmental safety. American Chemical Society, Washington, DC. pp. 1-13.

hinphy, 0. B. and Thurston, G. 1990. Insect immunity. In Gaugler, R and Kaya, H. K. (Eds). Entomopathogenic nematodes in biological control. CRC Press Inc., Boca Raton, n. pp. 30 1-326.

Dunphy, G. B. and Webster, J. M. 1984. Interactions of Xenorhabdus nemutophilus subsp. nematophilus with the hemolymph of Galleria mellunella. Journal of Insect Physiology 30: 883-889.

Dunphy, G. B. and Webster, J. M. 1988. Virulence mechanisms of Heterorhabditis heliothiài and its bactecial associate, Xenorhabdus luminescens, in non-immune larvae of

Page 201: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

the greater wax moth, Galleria mellonella. International Journal for Parasitology 18: 729-73 1.

Dunphy, O. B., Rutherford, T. A. and Webster, J. M. 1985. Growth and virulence of Steinemema glaseri influenced by different subspecies of Xenorhabdus nematophilus. Journal of Nematology 17: 476-482.

Dutky, S. R. 1937. investigation of the disease of immature stages of the Japanese beetle. Ph.D. Thesis, Rutgers University, New Brunswick, NJ. 1 13 pp.

Dutky, S. R. 1959. Insect microbiology. Advances in Applied Microbiology 1 : 175- 200.

Ehlers, R. U. and Johnjgk, S. 1998. Bacterial growth and signal production influence nematode development. In: The 24th International Nematology Symposium, Dundee, Scotland. p. 28 (Abstr.).

Ehlers, R. U., Stoessel, S. and Wyss, U. 1990. The influence of phase variants of Xenorhabdus spp. and Escherichia coli (Enterobacteriaceae) on the propagation of entomopathogenic nematodes of the genera Steinemema and Heterorhabditis. Revue de Nematologie 1 3 : 4 17-424.

Ehlers, R. U., Wyss, U. and Stackebrandt, E. 1988. 16s rRNA cataloguing and the phylogenetic position of the genus Xenorhabdus. Systematic and Applied Microbiology 10: 121-125.

Elawad, S. A. and Hague, N. O. M. 1998. Observations on the biology of the steinemematid S. abbasi. Nematologica 44: 487-488 (Abstr.).

Elawad, S., Ahmad, W. and Reid, A. P. 1997. Steinemem abbasi sp. n. (Nematoda: Steinernematidae) from the Sultanate of Oman. Fundamental and Applied Nemtology 20: 435-442.

Ensign, J. C., Bowen, D. J. and Bintrin, B. 1990. Crystalline inclusion proteins and an insecticidal toxin of Xenorhnbdus luniinescens strah NC19. In: Proceedings und Abstracts of Wh International Colloquium on Invertebrute Pathology and Microbial Control. Adelaide, Austraiia. p. 2 18 (Abstr.).

Farmer, J. J. 1995. Enterobacteriaceae: introduction and identification. In Murray, P. R., (Ed. in Cheif). Manual of clinical microbiology (6th edition) ASM Press, Washington, DC. pp. 438-449.

Famier, J. J., lorgensen, J. H., Grîmont, P. A. D., Akhurst, R. J., Poinar, G. O. Jr., Ageron, E., Pierce, G. V., Smith, J. A., Caaer, G. P., Wilson, K. and Hickman-Brenner,

Page 202: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

F. W. 1989. Xenorhabdus lwninescens ( D N A hybridization Group 5) from human clinical specimens. Joumal of Clinical Microbiology 27: 1 549- 1 600.

Filipjev, 1. N. 1934. Miscellanea nematologica 1. Eine neue art der gattung Neoaplectana Steiner nebst Bermerkungen uber die systematische Stellung der letzteren. Miscellanea Nematologica Magazine de Parasitologie de 1'Academie des Sciences de 1 'URSS. 4: 229-240.

Finney, D. J. 197 1. Probit unalysis (3rd edi tion). Cambridge University Press. 330pp.

Fischer, Le-saux, M., Arteaga, H. E.. Mracek, 2. and Boemare, N. E. 1999. The bacterial syrnbiont Xenorhabdus poinurii (Enterobacteriaceae) is harbored by two phylogenetic related host insects: the entomopathogenic species Steinemema cubanum and S. glasen (Nematoda: Steinemematidae). FEMS-Microbiology and Ecology 29: 14% 157.

Font, S. and Nealson, K. 1996. Molecular biology of the symbiotic-pathogenic bacteria Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. Microbiological Reviews 60: 2 1-43,

Freeman, B. A. 1985. Burrows textbook of microbiology (22nd edition) W. B. Saunden Co. Toronto. 1038pp.

Gardner, S. L., Stock, S. P. and Kaya, H. K. 1994. A new species of Heterorhabditis from the Hawaiian Islands. Journal of Parasitology 80: 100- 106.

Georgis, K. and Kelly, J. 1997. Novel pesticidal substances from the entomopathogenic nematode-bacterium cornplex. In Hedin, P. A. (Ed.). Phytochemicols for pest control. American Chemical Society, Washington, DC. pp. 1344 43.

Gerhardt, P. 198 1. Manual of methds for general bucteriolugy. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC. 524pp.

Gemtsen, L. I. M. and Smits, P. H. 1993. Variation in pathogenicity of recombinations of Heterorhabdiiis and Xenorhabdus lwninescens strains. Fundumental and Applied Nematology 16: 367-373.

Gemtsen, L. J. M. and Smits, P. H. 1997. The influence of Photorhbdu luminescens strains and fonn variants on the nproduction and bacterial retention of Heterorhbsitis megidis. Fundamental unà Applied Nenatology 20: 3 17-322.

Gerritsen, L. J. M., Raay, G. DE. and Smits, P. H. 1992. Characterization of fom variants of Xenorhabdw luminescens. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 58: 1975- 1979.

Page 203: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Gemtsen, L. J. M., van de Wolf, J. M., van Vuurde, W. L., Ehlers, R. U., Krasornil- Osterfeld and Smits, P. H. 1995. Polyclonal antisera to distinguish strains and form varian ts of Photo rhabdus (Xenorhabdus) luminescens. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 61: 284-289.

Givaudan, A. S., Baghdiguian, S., Lanois, A. and Boemare, N. 1995. Swatming and swimming changes concomitant with phage variation in Xenorhabdus nematophilus. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 6 1 : 1408- 14 13.

Glazer, 1. 1997. Effect of infected insects on secondary invasion of steinernematid entomopathogenic nematodes. Parusitobgy 1 14: 597-604.

Gotz, , P., Boman, A. and Boman, H. G. 198 1. Interactions between insect immunity and an insect-pathogenic nematode with symbiotic bacteria. Proceedings of Royal Society of London (B) 2 12: 333-350.

Gou, Le N., Fatig, R. O., OK, O. L., Schafer, B. W., Strickland, J. A., Sukhapinda, K., Woodsworth, A. T. and Petell, J. K. 1999. Photorhabdus luminescens W-14 insecticidal activity consists of at least two similar but distinct proteins-purification and characterization of toxin A and toxin B. Journal of Biological Chemistry 274: 9836- 9842.

Gouge, D. H., Otto, A. A., Schirwki. A. and Hague, N. G. M. 1994. Effects of Steinemematids on the root-knot nematode Meloidogyne jwnica. Annals of Applied Biology (Supplement) 124: 134- 135.

Grewal, P. S., Lewis, E. E., Gaugler, R. 1997. Response of infective stage parasites (Nematoda: Steinernematidae) to volatile cues h m infected hasts. Journal of Chernical Ecology 23: 503-5 15.

Hall, R. 1995. Challenges and prospects of intergrated pest management. In Reuveni, R. (Ed.). Novel upproaches to intergrated Pest management, CRC Press Inc., Boca Raton. pp. 1-15.

Han, R., C., Wouts, W. M. and Liying, L. 1991. Development and virulence of Heterorhabditis spp. strains associated with different Xenorhabdus lwninescens isolates. Jownal of Invertebrate Pathology 58: 27-32.

Hendrie, M. S., Holding, A. J. and Shewan, J. M. 1974. Amended descriptions of the genus Alcaligenes and of Alcaaligenes faecaiis and proposa1 that the genenc narne Achromobacter be rejected: status of the named species of Alcaligenes and Achromobacter. Internationd J o u d of Systematic Bacteriology 24: 534-550.

Page 204: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Herbert, D. A. Ir., Ang, B. N. and Hodges, R. L. 1996. Attractants for adult southern corn rootworm (Coleoptera: Chrysomelidae) monitoring in peanut fields and relationship of trap catch to pod damage. Journul of Economical Entomology 89: 5 15-524.

Hewitt, W. and Vincent, S. 1989. Theory und application of microbiological assay. Academic Press Inc., San Diego. pp. 323.

Hickey, K. D. 1986. Methods for evaluating pesticides for control of plant pathogens. The Amencan Phytopathological Society, Si. Paul, Minn. 323 pp.

Holding, A. I. and Collee, J. G. 197 1. Routine biochemical tests. In Norris, J. R. and Ribbons, D. W. (Eds). Methods in microbiology. Vol. 6A. Academic Press, New York. pp. 14-15.

Hu, K., Li, I., Wang, W., Wu, H., Lin, H. and Webster. J. M. 1998. Cornparison of metabolites produced in vitro and in vivo by Photorhabdus luminescens, a bacterial symbiont of the entomopathogenic nematode, Heterorhabditis megidis. Canadian Journal of Microbiology 44: 107% 1077.

Hurlbert, R. E., Xu, J. and Smdl, C. L. 1989. Colonial and cellular polymorphisms in Xenorhabdus luminescens. Applied und Environmental Microbiology 55: 1 136- 1 143.

Ishibashi, N., and Kondo, E. 1986. Steinernema feltiae @D-136) and S. glasen: persistence in soi1 and bark compost and their influence on native nematodes. Journal 4 Nematolugy 18: 3 10-3 16.

Ishikawa, M., Shuto, Y. and Hiroyasu, W. 1986. B-Myrcene, a potent attractant component of pine wood for pine wood nematode, Bursaphelenchus xyiophilus. Agriculture and Biological Chemistry 50: 1863- 1866.

Jackson, T., Wang, H., Nugent, M., Griffin, C., Burnell, A. and Dowds, B. 1995. Isolation of insect pathogenic bacteria, Providencia rettgeri, from Heterorhbditis spp. Journal of Applied Bacteriology 78: 237-244.

Janse, J. D. and Smits, P. H. 1990. Whole fatty acid patterns of Xenorhabdus species. Letfers of Applied Microbiology 10: 1 3 1 - 1 35.

Jarosz, J. 1996. Ecology of anti-microbials produced by bacterial associates of Steinemema carpocapsae and Heterorhabditis bacteriophora. Parasitology 1 12: 545- 552.

Jian, H., Reid, A. P. and Hunt, D. J. 1997. Steinemema ceratophonun n. sp. (Nematoda: Steinemematidae), a new entomopathogenic nematode from northeast China. Systemutic Parasitology 37: 1 15- 12s.

Page 205: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Kaya, H. K. and Koppenhofer, A. M. 1996. Effects of microbial and other antagonistic organism and cornpetition on entomopathogenic nematodes. Biocontrol Science and Technology 6: 357-37 1.

Kaya, H. K., Bedding, R. A. and Akhurst, R. J. 1993. An overview of insect-parasitic and entomopathogenic nematodes. In Kaya, H. K, Bedding, R. A. and Akhurst, R. J. (Eds). Nematodes and the biolog ical control ofpests. CSIRO. Vic tona, Austraiia. pp. 1-10.

Kondo, E. 1989. Studies on the infectivity and propagation of entomogenous nematodes, Steinemema spp. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae), in the common cutworm, Spodoptera litura (Lipidoptera: Noctuidae). Bulletin of the Faculty of Agriculture, Sega University 67: 1-88.

Koppenhofer, A. M. and Kaya, H. K. 1996. Coexistence of entomopathogenic nematode species (Steinemematidae and Heterorhabditidae) with different fonging behaviour. Fundamental and Applied Nematology 19: 175- 1 83.

Koppenhoter, A. M.. Baur, M. E. and Kaya, H. K. 1996. Cornpetition between two steinernematid nematode species for an insect host at different soi1 depths. J o u m l of Parasitology 82: 34-40.

Koppenhofer, A. M., Kaya, H. K., Shanmugam, S. and Wood, G. L. 1995. hterspecific cornpetition between Steinemematid nematodes within an insect host. Journal of Invertebrate Pathology 66: 99- 103.

Krasomil-Ostelfeld, K. C. 1995. Influence of osmolarity on phase shift in Photorhabdus luminescens. Applied and Environmentul Microbiology 6 1 : 3748-3749.

Kubo, 1. and Morimitsu, Y. 1995. Cytotoxicity of green tea flavor compounds against two solid tumor cells. Journal of Agricultural und Food Chemistry 43: 1626-1628.

Kubo, 1.. Muroi, H. and Himejima, M. 1993. Antibacterial activity against Streptococcus mutans of mate tea flavor compounds. Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry 41: 107-1 11.

Leclerc, M. C. and Boemare, N. E. 1991. Plasmids and phase variation in Xenorhabdus spp. Applied und Environmentul Microbiology 57: 2597-260 1.

Li, J., Chen, G. and Webster, J. M. 1995a. Antirnicrobid metabolites from a bacterial symbiont. Journal of Natural Products 58: L O8 1 - 1086.

Li, J., Chen, 0. and Webster, J. M. 1997a. NematopMn. a novel antimicrobial substance produced by Xenorhabdus nematophilus (Entembacteriaceae). Canadian Journal of Microbiology 43: 770-773.

Page 206: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Li, J., Chen, G. and Webster, J. M. 1997b. Syhthesis and antistaphylococcal activity of nematophin and its analogs. Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 7: 1349-1 352.

Li, J., Hu, K. and Webster, J. M. 1998. Antibiotics from Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. (Enterobacteriaceae). Chemistry of Heterocyciic Compounds 34: 1561-1570.

Li, J., Chen, G., Wu . H. and Webster, J. M. 1995b. Identification of two pigments and o hydroxystilbene antibiotic from Photorhabdus luminescem. Applied and Environ»iental Microbiology 61: 4329-4333.

Liu, J. 1994. A new species of the genus of Heterorhabditis fmm China (Rhabditida: Heterorhabditidae). Acta Zootaxonomica Sinica 19: 268-272.

Liu, J. and Berry, R. E., 1996a. Steinernema oregonensis n. sp. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae) from Oregon, U.S.A. Fundamental and Applied Nematology 19: 375- 380.

Liu, J. and Berry, R. E., 1996b. Heterorhabditis marelatus n. sp. (Rhabditida: Hetrorhabditidae) from Oregon. Journal of lnvertebrate Pathology 67: 48-54.

Liu, J., Berry, R., Poinar, G. O. Jr. and Moldenke, A. 1997. Phylogeny of Photorhabdus and Xenorhabdus species and strains as determined by cornparison of partial 16s rRNA gene sequences. International Journal of Systematic Bacteriology 47: 948-95 1.

Lopez-Robles, L., 1996. Evaiuation of entomopathogenic nematodes on the beet cyst nernatode Heterodera schachtii. Annals ofdpplied Biology (supplement) 128: 100- 10 1.

Lysenko. 0. and Weiser, 1. 1974. Bacteria associated with the nematode Neoaplectana carpocapsae and the pathogenicity of this complex for Galleria mellonella larvae. Journal of lnvertebrate Pathology 24: 332-336.

Mamiya, Y., 1984. The pine wood nematode. In Nickie, 'W. R. (Ed.). Plant and insect netnatodes. Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York. pp. 589-626.

Mamiya, Y. 1988. Steinernema kushidai n. sp. (Nematoda: Steinemematidae) associated with scarabaeid beetle larvae from Shizuoka, Japan. Applied Entomology and Zoofogy 23: 3 13-320.

Marban-Mendoza N. and Viglierchio, D. R. 1982. Behaviorai effects of carbofuran and phenamiphos on Pratylenchus vulnus. ïIL penetration and development. Journal of Nematolosy 12: 1 19- 129.

Page 207: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Maxwell, P. W., Chen, GoT Webster, J. M. and Dunphy, G. B. 1994. Stability and activities of antibiotics produced during infection of the insect Galleria meilonella by two isolates of Xenorhabus nematophilus. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 60: 7 15-721.

May, R. M. 1993. Resisting resistance. Nature 36 1 : 593.

McInemey, B. V., Gregson, R. P., Lacey, M. J., Akhunt, R. J., Lyons, G. R., Rhodes, S. H., Smith, D. R. S., Engelhardt, L. M. and White, A. H. 1991a Biologically active metabolites from Xenorhabdus spp. part 1. Dithiolop yrrolone derivatives with antibiotic activity. Joumal of Na tural Products 54: 774-784.

McInemey, B. V., Gregson. R. P., Lacey, M. J., Akhur~t, R. J., Lyons, G. R., Rhodes, S. H., Smith, D. R. J., Engelhardt, L. M. and White, A. H. 1991b. Biologically active metaboiites from Xenorhabdus spp. part 2. Benzopyran- 1 -one derivatives w ith gastroprotective ac tivi ty . Joumal of Na tural Products 54: 785-795.

McLeod, R. W. and Khair, G. T. 1975. Effects of oxirnecarbamate, organophosphate and benzirnidazole nematicides on life cycle stages of root-hot nematodes, Meloidogyne spp. Annals of Applied Biology 79: 329-34 1.

Miller, L. A. and Bedding, R. A. 1982. Field testing of the insect parasitic nematode, Neuaplectana bibionis (Nemat oda: S teinemematidae) agains t curran t borer moth, Synmthedon tipulifomis (Lip.: Sesiidae) in black-currants. Entomophaga 27: 109- 1 14.

Milstead, J. E., 1979. Heterorhabditis bacteriophora 3s a vector for introducing its associated bacterium into the hemocoel of Galleria meilonella larvae. Journal of Invertebrute Pathology 33: 324-427.

Moharnmad, A. A., Kondo, K. and Tsuda, Y. 1992. Spthesis and nematicidal activity of hyâroxystilbenes. Chernical and P hamceutical Bulletin 40: 1 130- L 136.

Morgan, I. A. W., Kuntzelmmn, V., Tavernor, S., Ousley, M.A. and Winstanley. 1997. Survival of Xenorhobdus nematophilus and Photorhabdus luminescens in water and soil. Joumal of Applied Microbiology 83: 665-670.

Mracek, 2. and Webster, J. M. 1993. Survey of Heterohabditidae and Steinemematidae (Rhabditida: Nematoda) in Western Canada Journal of Neniolology 25: 710-7 17.

Mracek, Z., Hemandez, E. A and Boemare, N. E., 1994. Steinememu cubana sp. n. (Nematoda: Rhabditida: Steinemematidae) and the preliMnary characterization of its associated bacterium. Joumal of lnvertebrate Pathology 64: 123- 129.

Page 208: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

National Research Council, 1996. Lessons from the past provide direction for the future. In Board On Agriculture, National Research Council (Ed.). Ecologically based Pest management, National Academy Press, Washington, DC. pp. 1-4 1.

Nguyen, K. and Smart, G. C. Jr. 1990. Steinemema scapterisci n. sp. (Rhabditida: S teinemematidae). Journal of Nenuitology 22: 187- 199.

Nguyen, K. and Smart, G. C. Jr. 1992. Steinemema neocurtillus n. sp. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae) and a key to species of the genus Steinemema. Joumal of Nematology 24: 463-477.

Nishimura, Y., Hagiwara, A., Suzuki, T. and Yarnanaka, S. 1994. Xenorhbdus japonicus sp. nov. associated with the nematode Steinemema kushidai. World Journal of Microbiology and Biotechnology 10: 207-2 10.

Noling, I. W. and Becker, J. 0. 1994. The challenge of research and extension to define and implement alternatives to methyl bromide. Journal of Nematology 26: 573-586.

Opperrnan, C. H. and Chang, S. 1990. Plant-parasitic nematode acetylcholinesterase inhibition by carbarnate and organophosphate nematicides. Journal of Nematology 22: 48 1-488.

Otoguro, K., Liu, 2.. Fukuda, K., Li, Y., Iwai. Y., Tanaka, H. and Omura, S. 1988. Screening for new nematocidal substances of microbial origin by a new method using the pine wood nematode. The Journal of Antibiotics 4 1 : 573-575.

Paul, V. J., Frautschy, S., Fenical, W. and Nealson, K. H. 198 1. Antibiotics in microbiai ecology: isolation and structure assignment of severai new antibacterial compounds for the insect symbiotic bacteria Xenorhabdus spp. Journal of Chentical Ecology 7: 589- 597.

Pimentel, D. 1997. Pest management in agriculture. In Pimentel, D (Ed.). Techniques for reducing pesticide use. John Wiley & Sons, New York. pp. 1-1 1.

Poinar, G. O., Ir. 1976. Description and biology of a new insect parasite rhabditoid, Heterorhabditis bucteriophora n. gen. n. sp. (Rhabditida: Heterorhabditidae n. farn.) Nematologica 2 1 : 463-470.

Poinar, G. O., Jr. 1985. Neouplectm intennedia n. sp. (Steinemematidae: Nematoda) from South Carolina Revue de Nematulogie 8: 32 1-327.

Poinar, G. O., Jr. 1986. A synopsis of the genus Neoaplectana. In Samson, R. S., Vlak. J. V. and Peters, D. (Eds). Fundamental and upplied aspects of invertebrute pathology. Proceedings of Nth International Colloquium on Invertebrute Puthology, Veldhoven, The Netherlands. pp. 29û-29 1.

Page 209: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Poinar, G. O., Jr. 1990. Biology and taxonomy of Steinernematidae and Heterorhabditidae. In Gaugler, R. and Kaya, H. K. (Eds). Entomopathogenic nematodes in biological control. CRC Press inc., Boca Raton, FL. pp. 23-62.

Poinar, G. O., Jr. and Thomas, G. M. 1965. A new bacterium, Achromobacter nematophilus sp. nov. (Achromobactenaceae: Eubacteriales) associated with a nematode. international Bulletin of Bacteriological Nomenclature Taxonomy 15: 249-252.

Poinar, G. O., Jr. and Thomas, G. M. 1966. Significance of Achromobacter nematophilus Poinar and Thomas (Achromobactenceae: Eubacterides) in the development of the nematode DD-136 (hkoaplectana sp., Steinernematidae ). Parasitology 56: 385-390.

Poinar, G. O., Jr. and Thomas, G. M. 1967. The nature of Achromobacter nematophilus as an insect pathogen. Joumal of Invertebraie Pathology 9: 5 10-5 14.

Poinar, G. O., Jr., Hess, R. T. and Thomas, G. 1980a. Isolation of defective bacteriophages from Xenorhabdus spp. (Enterobacteriaceae). IRCS Medical Science 8: 141.

Poinar, G. O. Jr., Jackson, T. and Klein, M. 1987. Heterorhabditis megidis sp. n. (Heterorhabditidae: Rhabditida), parasitic in the Japanese beetle, Popillia japonica (Scarabaeidae: Coleoptera), in Ohio. Proceedings of Helminthological Sociery of Washington 54: 53-59.

Poinar, G. O. Jr., Karunakar, G. K. and David. H. 1992. Heterorhabditis indicus n. sp. (Rhabditida: Nematoda) from India: separation of Heterorhabditis spp. by infective juveniles. Fundamental and Applied Nematology 15: 467-472.

Poinar, G. O., Jr., Thomas, G., Haygood, M., and Nealson, K. H. 1980b. Growth and luminescence of the symbiotic bacteria associated with terrestrial nematodes, Heterorhabditis bacteriophova. Soi1 Biology and Biochemistry 12: 5- 10.

Poinar, G. O., Jr, Hess, R. T., Lanier, W., Kinney, S. and White, J. H. 1989. Preliminary observations of a bacteriophage infecting Xenorhabdus luminescens (Enterobacteriaceae). Experimentia 45: 19 1- 192.

Rainey, F. A., Ehlers, EL U. and Stachebrandt, E. 1995. ïnability of the polyphasic approach to systematics to d e t e d n e the relatedness of the genera Xenorhubdus and Photorhabdus. Internotional Joumal of Systematic Bacteriology 45: 379-38 1.

Remers, W. A. 1972. Properties and ceactions of indoles, isoindoles, and their hydmgenated derivatives. In Houlihan, W. J. W.). Indoles (part one). John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Toronto. pp. 1-226.

Page 210: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Richardson, B. and Grewal, P. S. 1991. Comparative assessrnent of biological (Nematoda: Steinemema feltiae) and chernical methods of control for the mushroom fly Lycoriellu saloni (Diptera: Sciaridae). Biocontrol Science and Technology 1 : 2 1 7-228.

Richardson, W. H., Schmidt, T. M. and Nealson, K. H. 1988. Identification of an anthraquinone pigment and a hydroxystilbene antibiotic from Xenorhabdus luminescens. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 54: 1602- 1605.

Robinson, A. F. 1995. Optimal release rates for aîtracting Meloidogyne incognita, Rotylenchus renifonnis. and other nematodes to carbon dioxide in sand. Journal of Nematology 27 : 42-50.

Rodgers, P. B. 1993. Potentid of biopesticides in agriculture. Pesticide Science 39: 1 17-129.

Rodciguez-Kabana, R. 1986. Organic and inorganic nitrogen arnendments to soi1 as nematode suppressants. Journal of Nematology 1 8: 1 29- 1 35.

Roman, J. and Figueroa, W. 1994. Steinemema puertoricensis n. sp. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae), a new entomopathogenic nematode from Puerto Rico. Journal of Agriculture of the Universiq of Puerto Rico 78: 167- 175.

Sambeek, J. V. and Wiesner, A. 1999. Successful parasitation of locusts by entomopathogenic nematodes is correlated with inhibition of insect phagocytes. Joumal of Invertabrate Pathoiogy 73: 154- 16 1.

Sasser,I. N.andCarter,C.C.(Eds.). 1985. Anadvancedtreatise on Melodogyne. Vol. 1. Biology and c o n t d Department of Plant Pathology of North Carolina State University and United States Agency for International Development, Raleigh. 442 pp.

Shen, C. P. and Wang, G. H. 1992. Description of an entomopathogenic nematode, Steinemema Iongicaudwn sp. nov. and its application. In: Proceedings of the XIXh International Congress of Entomology, Beijing. pp. 220-23 1.

Shuto, Y., Kuwano, E., and Hiroyasu, W. 1989. A new hatching test for pine wood nematode and the inhibitory effect of benzimidazole derivatives. Agricultural and Biological Chemisîry 53: 171 1-1712.

Silvemmn, M. and Simon, M. 1983. Phase variation in Salmonella and relateâ systems. In Shapiro, J. A (Ed.). Mobile genetic elements. Academic Press, New York. pp. 537-577.

Smigielski, A. J.. Akhurst, R J. and Boemare, N. E. 1994. Phase va"ation in Xenorhabdus nemutophilus and Photorhabdus luniinescens: diffemces in respiratory

Page 211: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

activity and membrane energization. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 60: 120- 125.

Stackebrandt, E., Ehlers, R. U. and Rainey, F. A. 1997. Xenorhabdus and Photorhabdus: are they sister genera or are their menbers phylogenetically intertwinded? Symbiosis 22: 59-65.

Stadler, M., Anke. H., Arendholz, W., Hansske, F., Anders, U., Sterner, O and Bergquist, K. 1993. Lachnumon and lachnumol A, new metabolites with nematicidal and mtimicrobial activiîies from the Ascomycete Luchnum papyraceum. The Jounurl of Antibiotics 46: 96 1-967.

Steiner, 0. 1923. Aplectana kraussei n. sp., eine in der Blattwespe Lydo sp. parasitierende Nematodenfonn, nebst Bemerkungen uber das Seitenorgan der parasithchen Nematoden. Zentralblatt fur Bakteriologie. Parasitenkunde, Infekrionskrankheiten und Hygiene, Abteilung II 59: 14- 18.

Steiner, G. 1929. Neoaplectana glasen' n. g. n. sp. (Oxyuridae), a new nemic parasite of the Japanese beetlle (Popillia juponica Newm.). Journal of the Washington Academy of Science 19: 436-440.

Stephan, 2. A. and Tmdgill. D. L. 1983. Effect of time of application on the action of foliar spray of oxamyl on Meloidogyne hapla in tomato. Journal of Nematology 15: 96- 101.

Stock, S. P. 1993. A new species of the genus Heterorhabditis Poinar, 1976 (Nemaioda: Heterorhabditidae) parasitizing Graphognathus sp. larvae (Coleoptera: Curculionidae) from Argentina. Research and Reviews in Parasitology 53 : 103- 107.

Stock, S. P., Somsook, V. and Reid, A. P. 1998. Steinememu siamkayui n. sp. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae), an entomopathogenic nematode from Thailand. S ystematic Parasitology 4 1 : 105-1 13.

Stock, S. P., Choo, He Y. and Kaya, H. K. 1997. An entomopathogenic nematode, Steinemem monticoIum sp. n. (Rhabditida: Steinemematidae) €rom Korea with a key to other species. Nentatolog ica 43 : 1 5-29.

Stuart, R. I. and Gaugler, R. 1994. Patchiness of populations of entomopathogenic nematodes. Journal of tnvertebrate Pathology 64: 39-45.

Suga, T. 1994. Pest control chernicals against pine w d nematdes. US patent No. 053 14693.

Page 212: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Suga, T., Ohta, S., Munesada, K., Ide, N., Kurokawa, M., Shimizu, M. and Ohta, E. 1993. Endogenous pine wood nematicidal substances in pines, Pinus massoniana, P. strobus and P. palus tri^^ Phytochemistry 33: 1 395- 140 1.

Sulston, J. and Hodgkin, 1. 1988. Methods. In W. B. Wood, (Ed.). The nematode Caenorhabditis elegans. Cold Spnng Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, New York. pp. 587-606.

Sutherland, J. R. and Webster. J. M. 1993. Nematode pests of forest trees. In Evans, K., Tnidgill, D. L. and Webster, J. M. (Eds). Pluni-parasitic nematodes in temperate agriculture. CAB International. Wallingford, Oxon. pp. 35 1-380.

Sztaricskai, F., Dinya, 2.. Batta, GY, Szallas, E., Szentirmai, A. and Fodor, A. 1992. Anthraquinones produced by enterobacters and nematodes. Acta Chemica Hungarica- Models in Chemistry. 129: 697-707.

Tailosi, B., Peters, A. and Ehlers,R. U. 1995. Steinemema bicomutum sp. n. (Rhabdi tida: Nematoda) from Vojvodina, Yugoslavia. Russian Journal of Nematology. 3: 7 1-80.

Thaler, J., Baghdigian, S. and Boemare, N. E. 1995. Purification and chmcterization of xenorhabdicin, a phage tail-like bacteriocin, from the lysogenic strain Fl of Xenorhabdus nematophilus. Applied and Environnrental Microbiotogy 6 1 : 2049-2052.

Thaler, J. O., Boyer-Giglio, M. H. and Boemare, N. E. 1997. New antimicrobial barriers produced by Xenorhabdus spp. and Photorhabdus spp. to secure the monoxenic development of entomopathogenic nematodes. Symbiosis 22: 205-2 15.

Thanabalu, T., Porter, A. G. and Hindley, J. 1996. Purification and identification of a metabolites from Escherichia coli which is toxic to mosquito larvae. Jortrnal of Invertebrute Pathology 67: 306-308.

Thomas, O. M. and Poinar, G. O. Jr., 1979. Xenorhabdus gen. nov., a genus of entomopathogenic, nematophilic bacteria of the family Enterobacteriaceae. International Journal of Systematic Bacteriology 29: 352-360.

Thomas, G. M. and Poinar, G. O. Jr., 1983. Amendeci description of the genus Xemrhubdus Thomas and Poinar. international Journal of Systemutic Bacteriology 33: 878-879.

Vassallo, M. A. 1967. The nematicidal power of amrnonia. Nematologica 13: 155 (Abstr.).

Volgyi, A.. Fodor, A., Szentïrmai. A. and Forst, S. 1998. Phase variation in Xenorhabdus nematophifus. Applied und Environmental Microbiology 64: 1 188-1 193.

Page 213: OF SPP. AND SPP., - Library and Archives Canadacollectionscanada.gc.ca/obj/s4/f2/dsk1/tape7/PQDD... · application (

Waturu, C. N., Hunt, D. J. and Reid, A. P. 1997. Steinernema karii sp. n. (Nematoda: Steinemematidae), a new entornopathogenic nematode from Kenya. International Journal of Nematology 7: 68-75.

Webster, J. M., Chen, G. and Li, J. 1998. Parasitic wonns: an ally in the war against the superbugs. Parasitology Todoy 14: 1 6 1 - 1 63.

Weiser. J. 1955. Neouplectana carpocapsae n. sp. (Anguillulata, Steinernematidae), novy cizopasnik housenk obalece jablecneho, Carpocapsae pomonella L. Vesmik Ceskoslovenske Spolecnosti Zoologicke 1 9: 44-52.

Weiser, J. 1962. Uber die Benutzung der Nematoden zur biologischen Schadlingsbekarnphing. In Proceedings of XIth international congress of entomology, Vienna (1960) 2: 880-882.

Whitten, M. J., Jefferson, R. A. and Dall, D. 1996. Needs and opportunities. In Penley, G. J. (Ed.). Biotechnology and integrated pest management CAB International, Wailingford, Oxon. pp. 1-36.

Wilkinson. T. L. and Hay, D. B. 1997. Symbiotic interactions in the entomopathogenic nematodes. Symbiosis 22: 9- 19.

Wimpee, C., Nadeau,T. and Nealson, K. H. 199 1. Development of species-specific hybridization probes for marine luminous bacteria by using in vitro DNA amplification. Applied and Environmental Microbiology 55: 13 19- 13%.

Xu, C. 1998. The stability and cytotoxic properties of xenoncides and xenorhabdins, secondary metabolites of the entomopathogenic nematode spbiont, Xenorhabdus bovienii (Enterobacteriaceae). M.Sc. Thesis. Simon Fraser University, Vancouver. 1 1 1 PP*

Xu, Z., Wang, 0. and Li, X. 1991. A new species of the genus Steinernema (Rhabditida: S teinemematidae). Zwlogical Research 12: 17-20.

Yudina, T. G. and Egorov, N. S. 1996. The antimicrobiai activity of protein inclusions of different bacteria. Dokludy AWemi i Nuuk 349: 283-286.


Recommended